Mercurial > emacs
annotate src/dispnew.c @ 31600:ac8c86ff7ee3
(USE_MMAP_FOR_BUFFERS): Define instead of REL_ALLOC_MMAP.
author | Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org> |
---|---|
date | Thu, 14 Sep 2000 15:12:48 +0000 |
parents | d4f918f0b184 |
children | 2554afbeb88d |
rev | line source |
---|---|
314 | 1 /* Updating of data structures for redisplay. |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
2 Copyright (C) 1985, 86, 87, 88, 93, 94, 95, 97, 98, 1999 |
18853
4501a367a887
(direct_output_forward_char): Reenable check against
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18774
diff
changeset
|
3 Free Software Foundation, Inc. |
314 | 4 |
5 This file is part of GNU Emacs. | |
6 | |
7 GNU Emacs is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify | |
8 it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by | |
1777
4edfaa19c7a7
* window.c (window_internal_width): New function.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1766
diff
changeset
|
9 the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option) |
314 | 10 any later version. |
11 | |
12 GNU Emacs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, | |
13 but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of | |
14 MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the | |
15 GNU General Public License for more details. | |
16 | |
17 You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License | |
18 along with GNU Emacs; see the file COPYING. If not, write to | |
14186
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
19 the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, |
ee40177f6c68
Update FSF's address in the preamble.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14125
diff
changeset
|
20 Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA. */ |
314 | 21 |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
22 #include <config.h> |
314 | 23 #include <signal.h> |
7900
60795e826dad
Put stdio.h after config.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7814
diff
changeset
|
24 #include <stdio.h> |
314 | 25 #include <ctype.h> |
26 | |
21514 | 27 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H |
28 #include <unistd.h> | |
29 #endif | |
30 | |
3525
58e789baa27a
Include lisp.h earlier (before termhooks.h).
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3517
diff
changeset
|
31 #include "lisp.h" |
314 | 32 #include "termchar.h" |
33 #include "termopts.h" | |
2198 | 34 #include "termhooks.h" |
13526
34382f4e23cb
Always include dispextern.h before cm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13448
diff
changeset
|
35 /* cm.h must come after dispextern.h on Windows. */ |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
36 #include "dispextern.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
37 #include "cm.h" |
314 | 38 #include "buffer.h" |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
39 #include "charset.h" |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
40 #include "keyboard.h" |
764 | 41 #include "frame.h" |
314 | 42 #include "window.h" |
43 #include "commands.h" | |
44 #include "disptab.h" | |
45 #include "indent.h" | |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
46 #include "intervals.h" |
15065 | 47 #include "blockinput.h" |
21514 | 48 #include "process.h" |
314 | 49 |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
50 /* I don't know why DEC Alpha OSF1 fail to compile this file if we |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
51 include the following file. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
52 /* #include "systty.h" */ |
12917 | 53 #include "syssignal.h" |
554 | 54 |
314 | 55 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS |
56 #include "xterm.h" | |
25012 | 57 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ |
314 | 58 |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
59 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
60 #include "w32term.h" |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
61 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
62 |
25012 | 63 /* Include systime.h after xterm.h to avoid double inclusion of time.h. */ |
64 | |
7808
52e2eb6245d4
Include systime.h after xterm.h.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7648
diff
changeset
|
65 #include "systime.h" |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
66 #include <errno.h> |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
67 |
25012 | 68 /* To get the prototype for `sleep'. */ |
69 | |
70 #ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H | |
71 #include <unistd.h> | |
72 #endif | |
73 | |
314 | 74 #define max(a, b) ((a) > (b) ? (a) : (b)) |
75 #define min(a, b) ((a) < (b) ? (a) : (b)) | |
76 | |
77 /* Get number of chars of output now in the buffer of a stdio stream. | |
25012 | 78 This ought to be built in in stdio, but it isn't. Some s- files |
79 override this because their stdio internals differ. */ | |
80 | |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
81 #ifdef __GNU_LIBRARY__ |
25012 | 82 |
83 /* The s- file might have overridden the definition with one that | |
84 works for the system's C library. But we are using the GNU C | |
85 library, so this is the right definition for every system. */ | |
86 | |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
87 #ifdef GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
88 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT GNU_LIBRARY_PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
89 #else |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
90 #undef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
5214
c4bf07b226be
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) [__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Alternate definition for the GNU
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
5083
diff
changeset
|
91 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->__bufp - (FILE)->__buffer) |
7558
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
92 #endif |
8497bcb9fb8e
(PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT): If __GNU_LIBRARY__,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7530
diff
changeset
|
93 #else /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
26088
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
94 #if !defined (PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT) && HAVE_STDIO_EXT_H && HAVE___FPENDING |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
95 #include <stdio_ext.h> |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
96 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) __fpending (FILE) |
b7aa6ac26872
Add support for large files, 64-bit Solaris, system locale codings.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents:
25781
diff
changeset
|
97 #endif |
7443
a9cb818e5316
[__GNU_LIBRARY__]: Redefine PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT even if already defined.
Roland McGrath <roland@gnu.org>
parents:
7247
diff
changeset
|
98 #ifndef PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT |
314 | 99 #define PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT(FILE) ((FILE)->_ptr - (FILE)->_base) |
100 #endif | |
25012 | 101 #endif /* not __GNU_LIBRARY__ */ |
102 | |
29437 | 103 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
104 #include <term.h> /* for tgetent */ | |
105 #endif | |
25012 | 106 |
107 /* Structure to pass dimensions around. Used for character bounding | |
108 boxes, glyph matrix dimensions and alike. */ | |
109 | |
110 struct dim | |
111 { | |
112 int width; | |
113 int height; | |
114 }; | |
115 | |
116 | |
117 /* Function prototypes. */ | |
118 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
119 static void redraw_overlapping_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
120 static void redraw_overlapped_rows P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 121 static int count_blanks P_ ((struct glyph *, int)); |
122 static int count_match P_ ((struct glyph *, struct glyph *, | |
123 struct glyph *, struct glyph *)); | |
124 static unsigned line_draw_cost P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int)); | |
125 static void update_frame_line P_ ((struct frame *, int)); | |
126 static struct dim allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay | |
127 P_ ((Lisp_Object, int, int, struct dim, int, int *)); | |
128 static void allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct window *, | |
129 struct dim)); | |
130 static int realloc_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *, struct dim)); | |
131 static void adjust_frame_glyphs P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
132 struct glyph_matrix *new_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
133 static void free_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
134 static void adjust_glyph_matrix P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_matrix *, | |
135 int, int, struct dim)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
136 static void change_frame_size_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int, int, int, int)); |
25012 | 137 static void swap_glyph_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
138 #ifdef GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 139 static int glyph_row_slice_p P_ ((struct glyph_row *, struct glyph_row *)); |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
140 #endif |
25012 | 141 static void fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); |
142 static void build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
143 struct window *)); | |
144 static void build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, | |
145 struct window *)); | |
146 static struct glyph_pool *new_glyph_pool P_ ((void)); | |
147 static void free_glyph_pool P_ ((struct glyph_pool *)); | |
148 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_initially P_ ((void)); | |
149 static void adjust_frame_message_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
150 static void adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
151 static void fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *)); | |
152 static void build_frame_matrix P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
153 void clear_current_matrices P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
154 void scroll_glyph_matrix_range P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int, | |
155 int, int)); | |
156 static void clear_window_matrices P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
157 static void fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces P_ ((struct glyph_row *, int)); | |
158 static int scrolling_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
159 static int update_window_line P_ ((struct window *, int, int *)); |
25012 | 160 static void update_marginal_area P_ ((struct window *, int, int)); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
161 static int update_text_area P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 162 static void make_current P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, struct glyph_matrix *, |
163 int)); | |
164 static void mirror_make_current P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
165 void check_window_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct window *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
166 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
25012 | 167 static void check_matrix_pointers P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, |
168 struct glyph_matrix *)); | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
169 #endif |
25012 | 170 static void mirror_line_dance P_ ((struct window *, int, int, int *, char *)); |
171 static int update_window_tree P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
172 static int update_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
173 static int update_frame_1 P_ ((struct frame *, int, int)); | |
174 static void set_window_cursor_after_update P_ ((struct window *)); | |
175 static int row_equal_p P_ ((struct window *, struct glyph_row *, | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
176 struct glyph_row *, int)); |
25012 | 177 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); |
178 static void adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay P_ ((struct frame *)); | |
179 static void reverse_rows P_ ((struct glyph_matrix *, int, int)); | |
180 static int margin_glyphs_to_reserve P_ ((struct window *, int, Lisp_Object)); | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
181 static void sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows P_ ((struct window *)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
182 struct window *frame_row_to_window P_ ((struct window *, int)); |
25012 | 183 |
184 | |
185 | |
186 /* Non-zero means don't pause redisplay for pending input. (This is | |
187 for debugging and for a future implementation of EDT-like | |
188 scrolling. */ | |
189 | |
190 int redisplay_dont_pause; | |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
191 |
554 | 192 /* Nonzero upon entry to redisplay means do not assume anything about |
764 | 193 current contents of actual terminal frame; clear and redraw it. */ |
314 | 194 |
764 | 195 int frame_garbaged; |
314 | 196 |
25012 | 197 /* Nonzero means last display completed. Zero means it was preempted. */ |
314 | 198 |
199 int display_completed; | |
200 | |
25012 | 201 /* Lisp variable visible-bell; enables use of screen-flash instead of |
202 audible bell. */ | |
314 | 203 |
204 int visible_bell; | |
205 | |
764 | 206 /* Invert the color of the whole frame, at a low level. */ |
314 | 207 |
208 int inverse_video; | |
209 | |
210 /* Line speed of the terminal. */ | |
211 | |
212 int baud_rate; | |
213 | |
25012 | 214 /* Either nil or a symbol naming the window system under which Emacs |
215 is running. */ | |
314 | 216 |
217 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system; | |
218 | |
219 /* Version number of X windows: 10, 11 or nil. */ | |
25012 | 220 |
314 | 221 Lisp_Object Vwindow_system_version; |
222 | |
25012 | 223 /* Vector of glyph definitions. Indexed by glyph number, the contents |
224 are a string which is how to output the glyph. | |
314 | 225 |
226 If Vglyph_table is nil, a glyph is output by using its low 8 bits | |
25012 | 227 as a character code. |
228 | |
229 This is an obsolete feature that is no longer used. The variable | |
230 is retained for compatibility. */ | |
314 | 231 |
232 Lisp_Object Vglyph_table; | |
233 | |
234 /* Display table to use for vectors that don't specify their own. */ | |
235 | |
236 Lisp_Object Vstandard_display_table; | |
237 | |
25012 | 238 /* Nonzero means reading single-character input with prompt so put |
239 cursor on mini-buffer after the prompt. positive means at end of | |
240 text in echo area; negative means at beginning of line. */ | |
241 | |
314 | 242 int cursor_in_echo_area; |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
243 |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
244 Lisp_Object Qdisplay_table, Qredisplay_dont_pause; |
25012 | 245 |
314 | 246 |
25012 | 247 /* The currently selected frame. In a single-frame version, this |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
248 variable always equals the_only_frame. */ |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
249 |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
250 Lisp_Object selected_frame; |
25012 | 251 |
252 /* A frame which is not just a mini-buffer, or 0 if there are no such | |
764 | 253 frames. This is usually the most recent such frame that was |
9572 | 254 selected. In a single-frame version, this variable always holds |
255 the address of the_only_frame. */ | |
25012 | 256 |
257 struct frame *last_nonminibuf_frame; | |
258 | |
259 /* Stdio stream being used for copy of all output. */ | |
260 | |
261 FILE *termscript; | |
262 | |
263 /* Structure for info on cursor positioning. */ | |
264 | |
265 struct cm Wcm; | |
266 | |
267 /* 1 means SIGWINCH happened when not safe. */ | |
268 | |
269 int delayed_size_change; | |
270 | |
271 /* 1 means glyph initialization has been completed at startup. */ | |
272 | |
273 static int glyphs_initialized_initially_p; | |
274 | |
275 /* Updated window if != 0. Set by update_window. */ | |
276 | |
277 struct window *updated_window; | |
278 | |
279 /* Glyph row updated in update_window_line, and area that is updated. */ | |
280 | |
281 struct glyph_row *updated_row; | |
282 int updated_area; | |
283 | |
284 /* A glyph for a space. */ | |
285 | |
286 struct glyph space_glyph; | |
287 | |
288 /* Non-zero means update has been performed directly, so that there's | |
289 no need for redisplay_internal to do much work. Set by | |
290 direct_output_for_insert. */ | |
291 | |
292 int redisplay_performed_directly_p; | |
293 | |
294 /* Counts of allocated structures. These counts serve to diagnose | |
295 memory leaks and double frees. */ | |
296 | |
297 int glyph_matrix_count; | |
298 int glyph_pool_count; | |
299 | |
300 /* If non-null, the frame whose frame matrices are manipulated. If | |
301 null, window matrices are worked on. */ | |
302 | |
303 static struct frame *frame_matrix_frame; | |
304 | |
305 /* Current interface for window-based redisplay. Set from init_xterm. | |
306 A null value means we are not using window-based redisplay. */ | |
307 | |
308 struct redisplay_interface *rif; | |
309 | |
310 /* Non-zero means that fonts have been loaded since the last glyph | |
311 matrix adjustments. Redisplay must stop, and glyph matrices must | |
312 be adjusted when this flag becomes non-zero during display. The | |
313 reason fonts can be loaded so late is that fonts of fontsets are | |
314 loaded on demand. */ | |
315 | |
316 int fonts_changed_p; | |
317 | |
318 /* Convert vpos and hpos from frame to window and vice versa. | |
319 This may only be used for terminal frames. */ | |
320 | |
321 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
322 | |
323 static int window_to_frame_vpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
324 static int window_to_frame_hpos P_ ((struct window *, int)); | |
325 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) window_to_frame_vpos ((W), (VPOS)) | |
326 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) window_to_frame_hpos ((W), (HPOS)) | |
327 | |
328 #else /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
329 | |
330 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS(W, VPOS) ((VPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->top)) | |
331 #define WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS(W, HPOS) ((HPOS) + XFASTINT ((W)->left)) | |
332 | |
333 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG == 0 */ | |
334 | |
335 | |
336 /* Like bcopy except never gets confused by overlap. Let this be the | |
337 first function defined in this file, or change emacs.c where the | |
338 address of this function is used. */ | |
314 | 339 |
340 void | |
341 safe_bcopy (from, to, size) | |
342 char *from, *to; | |
343 int size; | |
344 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
345 if (size <= 0 || from == to) |
314 | 346 return; |
347 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
348 /* If the source and destination don't overlap, then bcopy can |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
349 handle it. If they do overlap, but the destination is lower in |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
350 memory than the source, we'll assume bcopy can handle that. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
351 if (to < from || from + size <= to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
352 bcopy (from, to, size); |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
353 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
354 /* Otherwise, we'll copy from the end. */ |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
355 else |
314 | 356 { |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
357 register char *endf = from + size; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
358 register char *endt = to + size; |
314 | 359 |
360 /* If TO - FROM is large, then we should break the copy into | |
361 nonoverlapping chunks of TO - FROM bytes each. However, if | |
362 TO - FROM is small, then the bcopy function call overhead | |
363 makes this not worth it. The crossover point could be about | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
364 anywhere. Since I don't think the obvious copy loop is too |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
365 bad, I'm trying to err in its favor. */ |
314 | 366 if (to - from < 64) |
367 { | |
368 do | |
369 *--endt = *--endf; | |
370 while (endf != from); | |
371 } | |
372 else | |
373 { | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
374 for (;;) |
314 | 375 { |
376 endt -= (to - from); | |
377 endf -= (to - from); | |
378 | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
379 if (endt < to) |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
380 break; |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
381 |
314 | 382 bcopy (endf, endt, to - from); |
383 } | |
1588
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
384 |
732a88db381f
* dispnew.c [not MULTI_FRAME] (Fredraw_display): Pass the correct
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1495
diff
changeset
|
385 /* If SIZE wasn't a multiple of TO - FROM, there will be a |
25012 | 386 little left over. The amount left over is (endt + (to - |
387 from)) - to, which is endt - from. */ | |
314 | 388 bcopy (from, to, endt - from); |
389 } | |
390 } | |
391 } | |
392 | |
25012 | 393 |
394 | |
395 /*********************************************************************** | |
396 Glyph Matrices | |
397 ***********************************************************************/ | |
398 | |
399 /* Allocate and return a glyph_matrix structure. POOL is the glyph | |
400 pool from which memory for the matrix should be allocated, or null | |
401 for window-based redisplay where no glyph pools are used. The | |
402 member `pool' of the glyph matrix structure returned is set to | |
403 POOL, the structure is otherwise zeroed. */ | |
404 | |
405 struct glyph_matrix * | |
406 new_glyph_matrix (pool) | |
407 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
408 { | |
409 struct glyph_matrix *result; | |
410 | |
411 /* Allocate and clear. */ | |
412 result = (struct glyph_matrix *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
413 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
414 | |
415 /* Increment number of allocated matrices. This count is used | |
416 to detect memory leaks. */ | |
417 ++glyph_matrix_count; | |
418 | |
419 /* Set pool and return. */ | |
420 result->pool = pool; | |
421 return result; | |
422 } | |
423 | |
424 | |
425 /* Free glyph matrix MATRIX. Passing in a null MATRIX is allowed. | |
426 | |
427 The global counter glyph_matrix_count is decremented when a matrix | |
428 is freed. If the count gets negative, more structures were freed | |
429 than allocated, i.e. one matrix was freed more than once or a bogus | |
430 pointer was passed to this function. | |
431 | |
432 If MATRIX->pool is null, this means that the matrix manages its own | |
433 glyph memory---this is done for matrices on X frames. Freeing the | |
434 matrix also frees the glyph memory in this case. */ | |
435 | |
436 static void | |
437 free_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
438 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
439 { | |
440 if (matrix) | |
441 { | |
442 int i; | |
443 | |
444 /* Detect the case that more matrices are freed than were | |
445 allocated. */ | |
446 if (--glyph_matrix_count < 0) | |
447 abort (); | |
448 | |
449 /* Free glyph memory if MATRIX owns it. */ | |
450 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
451 for (i = 0; i < matrix->rows_allocated; ++i) | |
452 xfree (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]); | |
453 | |
454 /* Free row structures and the matrix itself. */ | |
455 xfree (matrix->rows); | |
456 xfree (matrix); | |
457 } | |
458 } | |
459 | |
460 | |
461 /* Return the number of glyphs to reserve for a marginal area of | |
462 window W. TOTAL_GLYPHS is the number of glyphs in a complete | |
463 display line of window W. MARGIN gives the width of the marginal | |
464 area in canonical character units. MARGIN should be an integer | |
465 or a float. */ | |
466 | |
467 static int | |
468 margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, total_glyphs, margin) | |
469 struct window *w; | |
470 int total_glyphs; | |
471 Lisp_Object margin; | |
472 { | |
473 int n; | |
474 | |
475 if (NUMBERP (margin)) | |
476 { | |
477 int width = XFASTINT (w->width); | |
478 double d = max (0, XFLOATINT (margin)); | |
479 d = min (width / 2 - 1, d); | |
480 n = (int) ((double) total_glyphs / width * d); | |
481 } | |
482 else | |
483 n = 0; | |
484 | |
485 return n; | |
486 } | |
487 | |
488 | |
489 /* Adjust glyph matrix MATRIX on window W or on a frame to changed | |
490 window sizes. | |
491 | |
492 W is null if the function is called for a frame glyph matrix. | |
493 Otherwise it is the window MATRIX is a member of. X and Y are the | |
494 indices of the first column and row of MATRIX within the frame | |
495 matrix, if such a matrix exists. They are zero for purely | |
496 window-based redisplay. DIM is the needed size of the matrix. | |
497 | |
498 In window-based redisplay, where no frame matrices exist, glyph | |
499 matrices manage their own glyph storage. Otherwise, they allocate | |
500 storage from a common frame glyph pool which can be found in | |
501 MATRIX->pool. | |
502 | |
503 The reason for this memory management strategy is to avoid complete | |
504 frame redraws if possible. When we allocate from a common pool, a | |
505 change of the location or size of a sub-matrix within the pool | |
506 requires a complete redisplay of the frame because we cannot easily | |
507 make sure that the current matrices of all windows still agree with | |
508 what is displayed on the screen. While this is usually fast, it | |
509 leads to screen flickering. */ | |
510 | |
511 static void | |
512 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, x, y, dim) | |
513 struct window *w; | |
514 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
515 int x, y; | |
516 struct dim dim; | |
517 { | |
518 int i; | |
519 int new_rows; | |
520 int marginal_areas_changed_p = 0; | |
25546 | 521 int header_line_changed_p = 0; |
522 int header_line_p = 0; | |
25012 | 523 int left = -1, right = -1; |
524 int window_x, window_y, window_width, window_height; | |
525 | |
526 /* See if W had a top line that has disappeared now, or vice versa. */ | |
527 if (w) | |
528 { | |
25546 | 529 header_line_p = WINDOW_WANTS_HEADER_LINE_P (w); |
530 header_line_changed_p = header_line_p != matrix->header_line_p; | |
25012 | 531 } |
25546 | 532 matrix->header_line_p = header_line_p; |
25012 | 533 |
534 /* Do nothing if MATRIX' size, position, vscroll, and marginal areas | |
535 haven't changed. This optimization is important because preserving | |
536 the matrix means preventing redisplay. */ | |
537 if (matrix->pool == NULL) | |
538 { | |
539 window_box (w, -1, &window_x, &window_y, &window_width, &window_height); | |
540 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->left_margin_width); | |
541 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, w->right_margin_width); | |
542 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
543 marginal_areas_changed_p = (left != matrix->left_margin_glyphs | |
544 || right != matrix->right_margin_glyphs); | |
545 | |
546 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
547 && !fonts_changed_p | |
25546 | 548 && !header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 549 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) |
550 && matrix->window_height == window_height | |
551 && matrix->window_vscroll == w->vscroll | |
552 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
553 return; | |
554 } | |
555 | |
556 /* Enlarge MATRIX->rows if necessary. New rows are cleared. */ | |
557 if (matrix->rows_allocated < dim.height) | |
558 { | |
559 int size = dim.height * sizeof (struct glyph_row); | |
560 new_rows = dim.height - matrix->rows_allocated; | |
561 matrix->rows = (struct glyph_row *) xrealloc (matrix->rows, size); | |
562 bzero (matrix->rows + matrix->rows_allocated, | |
563 new_rows * sizeof *matrix->rows); | |
564 matrix->rows_allocated = dim.height; | |
565 } | |
566 else | |
567 new_rows = 0; | |
568 | |
569 /* If POOL is not null, MATRIX is a frame matrix or a window matrix | |
570 on a frame not using window-based redisplay. Set up pointers for | |
571 each row into the glyph pool. */ | |
572 if (matrix->pool) | |
573 { | |
574 xassert (matrix->pool->glyphs); | |
575 | |
576 if (w) | |
577 { | |
578 left = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
579 w->left_margin_width); | |
580 right = margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
581 w->right_margin_width); | |
582 } | |
583 else | |
584 left = right = 0; | |
585 | |
586 for (i = 0; i < dim.height; ++i) | |
587 { | |
588 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[i]; | |
589 | |
590 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
591 = (matrix->pool->glyphs | |
592 + (y + i) * matrix->pool->ncolumns | |
593 + x); | |
594 | |
595 if (w == NULL | |
596 || row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 597 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 598 { |
599 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
600 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
601 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
602 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
603 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
604 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
605 } | |
606 else | |
607 { | |
608 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
609 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
610 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
611 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
612 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
613 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
614 } | |
615 } | |
616 | |
617 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
618 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
619 } | |
620 else | |
621 { | |
622 /* If MATRIX->pool is null, MATRIX is responsible for managing | |
623 its own memory. Allocate glyph memory from the heap. */ | |
624 if (dim.width > matrix->matrix_w | |
625 || new_rows | |
25546 | 626 || header_line_changed_p |
25012 | 627 || marginal_areas_changed_p) |
628 { | |
629 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
630 struct glyph_row *end = row + matrix->rows_allocated; | |
631 | |
632 while (row < end) | |
633 { | |
634 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
635 = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA], | |
636 (dim.width | |
637 * sizeof (struct glyph))); | |
638 | |
639 /* The mode line never has marginal areas. */ | |
640 if (row == matrix->rows + dim.height - 1 | |
25546 | 641 || (row == matrix->rows && matrix->header_line_p)) |
25012 | 642 { |
643 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
644 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
645 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
646 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width; | |
647 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
648 = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
649 } | |
650 else | |
651 { | |
652 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
653 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + left; | |
654 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] | |
655 = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + dim.width - left - right; | |
656 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] | |
657 = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] + dim.width; | |
658 } | |
659 ++row; | |
660 } | |
661 } | |
662 | |
663 xassert (left >= 0 && right >= 0); | |
664 matrix->left_margin_glyphs = left; | |
665 matrix->right_margin_glyphs = right; | |
666 } | |
667 | |
668 /* Number of rows to be used by MATRIX. */ | |
669 matrix->nrows = dim.height; | |
670 | |
671 /* Mark rows in a current matrix of a window as not having valid | |
672 contents. It's important to not do this for desired matrices. | |
673 When Emacs starts, it may already be building desired matrices | |
674 when this function runs. */ | |
675 if (w && matrix == w->current_matrix) | |
676 { | |
677 /* Optimize the case that only the height has changed (C-x 2, | |
678 upper window). Invalidate all rows that are no longer part | |
679 of the window. */ | |
680 if (!marginal_areas_changed_p | |
681 && matrix->window_top_y == XFASTINT (w->top) | |
682 && matrix->window_width == window_width) | |
683 { | |
684 i = 0; | |
685 while (matrix->rows[i].enabled_p | |
686 && (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (matrix->rows + i) | |
687 < matrix->window_height)) | |
688 ++i; | |
689 | |
690 /* Window end is invalid, if inside of the rows that | |
691 are invalidated. */ | |
692 if (INTEGERP (w->window_end_vpos) | |
693 && XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos) >= i) | |
694 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
695 | |
696 while (i < matrix->nrows) | |
697 matrix->rows[i++].enabled_p = 0; | |
698 } | |
699 else | |
700 { | |
701 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
702 matrix->rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
703 } | |
704 } | |
705 | |
706 /* Remember last values to be able to optimize frame redraws. */ | |
707 matrix->matrix_x = x; | |
708 matrix->matrix_y = y; | |
709 matrix->matrix_w = dim.width; | |
710 matrix->matrix_h = dim.height; | |
711 | |
712 /* Record the top y location and height of W at the time the matrix | |
713 was last adjusted. This is used to optimize redisplay above. */ | |
714 if (w) | |
715 { | |
716 matrix->window_top_y = XFASTINT (w->top); | |
717 matrix->window_height = window_height; | |
718 matrix->window_width = window_width; | |
719 matrix->window_vscroll = w->vscroll; | |
720 } | |
721 } | |
722 | |
723 | |
724 /* Reverse the contents of rows in MATRIX between START and END. The | |
725 contents of the row at END - 1 end up at START, END - 2 at START + | |
726 1 etc. This is part of the implementation of rotate_matrix (see | |
727 below). */ | |
314 | 728 |
729 static void | |
25012 | 730 reverse_rows (matrix, start, end) |
731 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
732 int start, end; | |
314 | 733 { |
25012 | 734 int i, j; |
735 | |
736 for (i = start, j = end - 1; i < j; ++i, --j) | |
737 { | |
738 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
739 initialization. */ | |
740 struct glyph_row temp; | |
741 temp = matrix->rows[i]; | |
742 matrix->rows[i] = matrix->rows[j]; | |
743 matrix->rows[j] = temp; | |
744 } | |
314 | 745 } |
746 | |
25012 | 747 |
748 /* Rotate the contents of rows in MATRIX in the range FIRST .. LAST - | |
749 1 by BY positions. BY < 0 means rotate left, i.e. towards lower | |
750 indices. (Note: this does not copy glyphs, only glyph pointers in | |
751 row structures are moved around). | |
752 | |
753 The algorithm used for rotating the vector was, I believe, first | |
754 described by Kernighan. See the vector R as consisting of two | |
755 sub-vectors AB, where A has length BY for BY >= 0. The result | |
756 after rotating is then BA. Reverse both sub-vectors to get ArBr | |
757 and reverse the result to get (ArBr)r which is BA. Similar for | |
758 rotating right. */ | |
759 | |
760 void | |
761 rotate_matrix (matrix, first, last, by) | |
762 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
763 int first, last, by; | |
314 | 764 { |
25012 | 765 if (by < 0) |
766 { | |
767 /* Up (rotate left, i.e. towards lower indices). */ | |
768 by = -by; | |
769 reverse_rows (matrix, first, first + by); | |
770 reverse_rows (matrix, first + by, last); | |
771 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
772 } | |
773 else if (by > 0) | |
314 | 774 { |
25012 | 775 /* Down (rotate right, i.e. towards higher indices). */ |
776 reverse_rows (matrix, last - by, last); | |
777 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last - by); | |
778 reverse_rows (matrix, first, last); | |
314 | 779 } |
25012 | 780 } |
781 | |
782 | |
783 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph rows of MATRIX. Do it for rows | |
784 with indices START <= index < END. Increment positions by DELTA/ | |
785 DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
786 | |
787 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
788 increment_matrix_positions (matrix, start, end, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 789 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; |
790 int start, end, delta, delta_bytes; | |
791 { | |
792 /* Check that START and END are reasonable values. */ | |
793 xassert (start >= 0 && start <= matrix->nrows); | |
794 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
795 xassert (start <= end); | |
796 | |
797 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
798 increment_row_positions (matrix->rows + start, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 799 } |
800 | |
801 | |
802 /* Enable a range of rows in glyph matrix MATRIX. START and END are | |
803 the row indices of the first and last + 1 row to enable. If | |
804 ENABLED_P is non-zero, enabled_p flags in rows will be set to 1. */ | |
805 | |
806 void | |
807 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, start, end, enabled_p) | |
808 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
809 int start, end; | |
810 int enabled_p; | |
811 { | |
812 xassert (start <= end); | |
813 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
814 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
815 | |
816 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
817 matrix->rows[start].enabled_p = enabled_p != 0; | |
818 } | |
819 | |
820 | |
821 /* Clear MATRIX. | |
822 | |
823 This empties all rows in MATRIX by setting the enabled_p flag for | |
824 all rows of the matrix to zero. The function prepare_desired_row | |
825 will eventually really clear a row when it sees one with a zero | |
826 enabled_p flag. | |
827 | |
828 Resets update hints to defaults value. The only update hint | |
829 currently present is the flag MATRIX->no_scrolling_p. */ | |
830 | |
831 void | |
832 clear_glyph_matrix (matrix) | |
833 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
834 { | |
835 if (matrix) | |
314 | 836 { |
25012 | 837 enable_glyph_matrix_rows (matrix, 0, matrix->nrows, 0); |
838 matrix->no_scrolling_p = 0; | |
314 | 839 } |
840 } | |
25012 | 841 |
842 | |
843 /* Shift part of the glyph matrix MATRIX of window W up or down. | |
844 Increment y-positions in glyph rows between START and END by DY, | |
845 and recompute their visible height. */ | |
846 | |
847 void | |
848 shift_glyph_matrix (w, matrix, start, end, dy) | |
849 struct window *w; | |
850 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
851 int start, end, dy; | |
852 { | |
853 int min_y, max_y; | |
854 | |
855 xassert (start <= end); | |
856 xassert (start >= 0 && start < matrix->nrows); | |
857 xassert (end >= 0 && end <= matrix->nrows); | |
858 | |
25546 | 859 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 860 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
861 | |
862 for (; start < end; ++start) | |
863 { | |
864 struct glyph_row *row = &matrix->rows[start]; | |
865 | |
866 row->y += dy; | |
867 | |
868 if (row->y < min_y) | |
869 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
870 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
871 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
872 else | |
873 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
874 } | |
875 } | |
876 | |
877 | |
878 /* Mark all rows in current matrices of frame F as invalid. Marking | |
879 invalid is done by setting enabled_p to zero for all rows in a | |
880 current matrix. */ | |
881 | |
882 void | |
883 clear_current_matrices (f) | |
884 register struct frame *f; | |
885 { | |
886 /* Clear frame current matrix, if we have one. */ | |
887 if (f->current_matrix) | |
888 clear_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
889 | |
890 /* Clear the matrix of the menu bar window, if such a window exists. | |
891 The menu bar window is currently used to display menus on X when | |
892 no toolkit support is compiled in. */ | |
893 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
894 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->current_matrix); | |
895 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
896 /* Clear the matrix of the tool-bar window, if any. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
897 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
898 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->current_matrix); |
25012 | 899 |
900 /* Clear current window matrices. */ | |
901 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
902 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 0); | |
903 } | |
904 | |
905 | |
906 /* Clear out all display lines of F for a coming redisplay. */ | |
314 | 907 |
21514 | 908 void |
25012 | 909 clear_desired_matrices (f) |
910 register struct frame *f; | |
314 | 911 { |
25012 | 912 if (f->desired_matrix) |
913 clear_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
914 | |
915 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
916 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window)->desired_matrix); | |
917 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
918 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
919 clear_glyph_matrix (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->desired_matrix); |
25012 | 920 |
921 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
922 xassert (WINDOWP (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
923 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
924 } | |
925 | |
926 | |
927 /* Clear matrices in window tree rooted in W. If DESIRED_P is | |
928 non-zero clear desired matrices, otherwise clear current matrices. */ | |
929 | |
930 static void | |
931 clear_window_matrices (w, desired_p) | |
932 struct window *w; | |
933 int desired_p; | |
934 { | |
935 while (w) | |
314 | 936 { |
25012 | 937 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
938 { | |
939 xassert (WINDOWP (w->hchild)); | |
940 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild), desired_p); | |
941 } | |
942 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
314 | 943 { |
25012 | 944 xassert (WINDOWP (w->vchild)); |
945 clear_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild), desired_p); | |
946 } | |
947 else | |
948 { | |
949 if (desired_p) | |
950 clear_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
951 else | |
314 | 952 { |
25012 | 953 clear_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); |
954 w->window_end_valid = Qnil; | |
314 | 955 } |
25012 | 956 } |
957 | |
958 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
959 } | |
960 } | |
961 | |
962 | |
963 | |
964 /*********************************************************************** | |
965 Glyph Rows | |
966 | |
967 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph rows. | |
968 ***********************************************************************/ | |
969 | |
970 /* Clear glyph row ROW. Do it in a way that makes it robust against | |
971 changes in the glyph_row structure, i.e. addition or removal of | |
972 structure members. */ | |
973 | |
974 void | |
975 clear_glyph_row (row) | |
976 struct glyph_row *row; | |
977 { | |
978 struct glyph *p[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
979 static struct glyph_row null_row; | |
980 | |
981 /* Save pointers. */ | |
982 p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
983 p[TEXT_AREA] = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
984 p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
985 p[LAST_AREA] = row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
986 | |
987 /* Clear. */ | |
988 *row = null_row; | |
989 | |
990 /* Restore pointers. */ | |
991 row->glyphs[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
992 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] = p[TEXT_AREA]; | |
993 row->glyphs[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA] = p[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]; | |
994 row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] = p[LAST_AREA]; | |
30041
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
995 |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
996 #if 0 /* At some point, some bit-fields of struct glyph were not set, |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
997 which made glyphs unequal when compared with GLYPH_EQUAL_P. |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
998 Redisplay outputs such glyphs, and flickering effects were |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
999 the result. This also depended on the contents of memory |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1000 returned by xmalloc. If flickering happens again, activate |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1001 the code below If the flickering is gone with that, chances |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1002 are that the flickering has the same reason as here. */ |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1003 bzero (p[0], (char *) p[LAST_AREA] - (char *) p[0]); |
b20d72b7aa4b
(clear_glyph_row): Add debug code in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29980
diff
changeset
|
1004 #endif |
25012 | 1005 } |
1006 | |
1007 | |
1008 /* Make ROW an empty, enabled row of canonical character height, | |
1009 in window W starting at y-position Y. */ | |
1010 | |
1011 void | |
1012 blank_row (w, row, y) | |
1013 struct window *w; | |
1014 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1015 int y; | |
1016 { | |
1017 int min_y, max_y; | |
1018 | |
25546 | 1019 min_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEADER_LINE_HEIGHT (w); |
25012 | 1020 max_y = WINDOW_DISPLAY_HEIGHT_NO_MODE_LINE (w); |
1021 | |
1022 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1023 row->y = y; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1024 row->ascent = row->phys_ascent = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1025 row->height = row->phys_height = CANON_Y_UNIT (XFRAME (w->frame)); |
25012 | 1026 |
1027 if (row->y < min_y) | |
1028 row->visible_height = row->height - (min_y - row->y); | |
1029 else if (row->y + row->height > max_y) | |
1030 row->visible_height = row->height - (row->y + row->height - max_y); | |
1031 else | |
1032 row->visible_height = row->height; | |
1033 | |
1034 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1035 } | |
1036 | |
1037 | |
1038 /* Increment buffer positions in glyph row ROW. DELTA and DELTA_BYTES | |
1039 are the amounts by which to change positions. Note that the first | |
1040 glyph of the text area of a row can have a buffer position even if | |
1041 the used count of the text area is zero. Such rows display line | |
1042 ends. */ | |
1043 | |
1044 void | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1045 increment_row_positions (row, delta, delta_bytes) |
25012 | 1046 struct glyph_row *row; |
1047 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1048 { | |
1049 int area, i; | |
1050 | |
1051 /* Increment start and end positions. */ | |
1052 MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1053 MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1054 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) += delta; | |
1055 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) += delta_bytes; | |
1056 | |
1057 /* Increment positions in glyphs. */ | |
1058 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1059 for (i = 0; i < row->used[area]; ++i) | |
1060 if (BUFFERP (row->glyphs[area][i].object) | |
1061 && row->glyphs[area][i].charpos > 0) | |
1062 row->glyphs[area][i].charpos += delta; | |
1063 | |
1064 /* Capture the case of rows displaying a line end. */ | |
1065 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] == 0 | |
1066 && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1067 row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]->charpos += delta; | |
1068 } | |
1069 | |
1070 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1071 #if 0 |
25012 | 1072 /* Swap glyphs between two glyph rows A and B. This exchanges glyph |
1073 contents, i.e. glyph structure contents are exchanged between A and | |
1074 B without changing glyph pointers in A and B. */ | |
1075 | |
1076 static void | |
1077 swap_glyphs_in_rows (a, b) | |
1078 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1079 { | |
1080 int area; | |
1081 | |
1082 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1083 { | |
1084 /* Number of glyphs to swap. */ | |
1085 int max_used = max (a->used[area], b->used[area]); | |
1086 | |
1087 /* Start of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1088 struct glyph *glyph_a = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1089 | |
1090 /* End + 1 of glyphs in area of row A. */ | |
1091 struct glyph *glyph_a_end = a->glyphs[max_used]; | |
1092 | |
1093 /* Start of glyphs in area of row B. */ | |
1094 struct glyph *glyph_b = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1095 | |
1096 while (glyph_a < glyph_a_end) | |
1097 { | |
1098 /* Non-ISO HP/UX compiler doesn't like auto struct | |
1099 initialization. */ | |
1100 struct glyph temp; | |
1101 temp = *glyph_a; | |
1102 *glyph_a = *glyph_b; | |
1103 *glyph_b = temp; | |
1104 ++glyph_a; | |
1105 ++glyph_b; | |
314 | 1106 } |
1107 } | |
1108 } | |
25012 | 1109 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1110 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1111 |
1112 /* Exchange pointers to glyph memory between glyph rows A and B. */ | |
1113 | |
1114 static INLINE void | |
1115 swap_glyph_pointers (a, b) | |
1116 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
1117 { | |
1118 int i; | |
1119 for (i = 0; i < LAST_AREA + 1; ++i) | |
1120 { | |
1121 struct glyph *temp = a->glyphs[i]; | |
1122 a->glyphs[i] = b->glyphs[i]; | |
1123 b->glyphs[i] = temp; | |
1124 } | |
1125 } | |
1126 | |
1127 | |
1128 /* Copy glyph row structure FROM to glyph row structure TO, except | |
1129 that glyph pointers in the structures are left unchanged. */ | |
1130 | |
1131 INLINE void | |
1132 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from) | |
1133 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1134 { | |
1135 struct glyph *pointers[1 + LAST_AREA]; | |
1136 | |
1137 /* Save glyph pointers of TO. */ | |
1138 bcopy (to->glyphs, pointers, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1139 | |
1140 /* Do a structure assignment. */ | |
1141 *to = *from; | |
1142 | |
1143 /* Restore original pointers of TO. */ | |
1144 bcopy (pointers, to->glyphs, sizeof to->glyphs); | |
1145 } | |
1146 | |
1147 | |
1148 /* Copy contents of glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. Glyph pointers in | |
1149 TO and FROM are left unchanged. Glyph contents are copied from the | |
1150 glyph memory of FROM to the glyph memory of TO. Increment buffer | |
1151 positions in row TO by DELTA/ DELTA_BYTES. */ | |
1152 | |
1153 void | |
1154 copy_glyph_row_contents (to, from, delta, delta_bytes) | |
1155 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1156 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
1157 { | |
1158 int area; | |
1159 | |
1160 /* This is like a structure assignment TO = FROM, except that | |
1161 glyph pointers in the rows are left unchanged. */ | |
1162 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1163 | |
1164 /* Copy glyphs from FROM to TO. */ | |
1165 for (area = 0; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1166 if (from->used[area]) | |
1167 bcopy (from->glyphs[area], to->glyphs[area], | |
1168 from->used[area] * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
1169 | |
1170 /* Increment buffer positions in TO by DELTA. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
1171 increment_row_positions (to, delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 1172 } |
1173 | |
1174 | |
1175 /* Assign glyph row FROM to glyph row TO. This works like a structure | |
1176 assignment TO = FROM, except that glyph pointers are not copied but | |
1177 exchanged between TO and FROM. Pointers must be exchanged to avoid | |
1178 a memory leak. */ | |
1179 | |
1180 static INLINE void | |
1181 assign_row (to, from) | |
1182 struct glyph_row *to, *from; | |
1183 { | |
1184 swap_glyph_pointers (to, from); | |
1185 copy_row_except_pointers (to, from); | |
1186 } | |
1187 | |
1188 | |
1189 /* Test whether the glyph memory of the glyph row WINDOW_ROW, which is | |
1190 a row in a window matrix, is a slice of the glyph memory of the | |
1191 glyph row FRAME_ROW which is a row in a frame glyph matrix. Value | |
1192 is non-zero if the glyph memory of WINDOW_ROW is part of the glyph | |
1193 memory of FRAME_ROW. */ | |
1194 | |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1195 #ifdef GLYPH_DEBUG |
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1196 |
25012 | 1197 static int |
1198 glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row) | |
1199 struct glyph_row *window_row, *frame_row; | |
1200 { | |
1201 struct glyph *window_glyph_start = window_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1202 struct glyph *frame_glyph_start = frame_row->glyphs[0]; | |
1203 struct glyph *frame_glyph_end = frame_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA]; | |
1204 | |
1205 return (frame_glyph_start <= window_glyph_start | |
1206 && window_glyph_start < frame_glyph_end); | |
1207 } | |
1208 | |
30323
4cd1b8fe118c
(direct_output_for_insert): Remove confusing
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30307
diff
changeset
|
1209 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ |
25012 | 1210 |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1211 #if 0 |
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1212 |
25012 | 1213 /* Find the row in the window glyph matrix WINDOW_MATRIX being a slice |
1214 of ROW in the frame matrix FRAME_MATRIX. Value is null if no row | |
1215 in WINDOW_MATRIX is found satisfying the condition. */ | |
1216 | |
1217 static struct glyph_row * | |
1218 find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, row) | |
1219 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
1220 int row; | |
1221 { | |
1222 int i; | |
1223 | |
1224 xassert (row >= 0 && row < frame_matrix->nrows); | |
1225 | |
1226 for (i = 0; i < window_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1227 if (glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
1228 frame_matrix->rows + row)) | |
1229 break; | |
1230 | |
1231 return i < window_matrix->nrows ? window_matrix->rows + i : 0; | |
1232 } | |
1233 | |
29336
5ccfe8a1638f
(find_glyph_row_slice, swap_glyphs_in_rows): Put in #if 0.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28708
diff
changeset
|
1234 #endif /* 0 */ |
25012 | 1235 |
1236 /* Prepare ROW for display. Desired rows are cleared lazily, | |
1237 i.e. they are only marked as to be cleared by setting their | |
1238 enabled_p flag to zero. When a row is to be displayed, a prior | |
1239 call to this function really clears it. */ | |
1240 | |
1241 void | |
1242 prepare_desired_row (row) | |
1243 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1244 { | |
1245 if (!row->enabled_p) | |
1246 { | |
1247 clear_glyph_row (row); | |
1248 row->enabled_p = 1; | |
1249 } | |
1250 } | |
1251 | |
1252 | |
1253 /* Return a hash code for glyph row ROW. */ | |
1254 | |
1255 int | |
1256 line_hash_code (row) | |
1257 struct glyph_row *row; | |
1258 { | |
1259 int hash = 0; | |
1260 | |
1261 if (row->enabled_p) | |
1262 { | |
1263 if (row->inverse_p) | |
1264 { | |
1265 /* Give all highlighted lines the same hash code | |
1266 so as to encourage scrolling to leave them in place. */ | |
1267 hash = -1; | |
1268 } | |
1269 else | |
1270 { | |
1271 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1272 struct glyph *end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1273 | |
1274 while (glyph < end) | |
1275 { | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1276 int c = glyph->u.ch; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1277 int face_id = glyph->face_id; |
25012 | 1278 if (must_write_spaces) |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1279 c -= SPACEGLYPH; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1280 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + c; |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1281 hash = (((hash << 4) + (hash >> 24)) & 0x0fffffff) + face_id; |
25012 | 1282 ++glyph; |
1283 } | |
1284 | |
1285 if (hash == 0) | |
1286 hash = 1; | |
1287 } | |
1288 } | |
1289 | |
1290 return hash; | |
1291 } | |
1292 | |
1293 | |
1294 /* Return the cost of drawing line VPOS In MATRIX. The cost equals | |
1295 the number of characters in the line. If must_write_spaces is | |
1296 zero, leading and trailing spaces are ignored. */ | |
1297 | |
1298 static unsigned int | |
1299 line_draw_cost (matrix, vpos) | |
1300 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1301 int vpos; | |
1302 { | |
1303 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows + vpos; | |
1304 struct glyph *beg = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1305 struct glyph *end = beg + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
1306 int len; | |
1307 Lisp_Object *glyph_table_base = GLYPH_TABLE_BASE; | |
1308 int glyph_table_len = GLYPH_TABLE_LENGTH; | |
1309 | |
1310 /* Ignore trailing and leading spaces if we can. */ | |
1311 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
1312 { | |
1313 /* Skip from the end over trailing spaces. */ | |
1314 while (end != beg && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*end)) | |
1315 --end; | |
1316 | |
1317 /* All blank line. */ | |
1318 if (end == beg) | |
1319 return 0; | |
1320 | |
1321 /* Skip over leading spaces. */ | |
1322 while (CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (*beg)) | |
1323 ++beg; | |
1324 } | |
1325 | |
1326 /* If we don't have a glyph-table, each glyph is one character, | |
1327 so return the number of glyphs. */ | |
1328 if (glyph_table_base == 0) | |
1329 len = end - beg; | |
1330 else | |
1331 { | |
1332 /* Otherwise, scan the glyphs and accumulate their total length | |
1333 in LEN. */ | |
1334 len = 0; | |
1335 while (beg < end) | |
1336 { | |
1337 GLYPH g = GLYPH_FROM_CHAR_GLYPH (*beg); | |
1338 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1339 if (g < 0 |
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
1340 || GLYPH_SIMPLE_P (glyph_table_base, glyph_table_len, g)) |
25012 | 1341 len += 1; |
1342 else | |
1343 len += GLYPH_LENGTH (glyph_table_base, g); | |
1344 | |
1345 ++beg; | |
1346 } | |
1347 } | |
1348 | |
1349 return len; | |
1350 } | |
1351 | |
1352 | |
1353 /* Test two glyph rows A and B for equality. Value is non-zero if A | |
1354 and B have equal contents. W is the window to which the glyphs | |
1355 rows A and B belong. It is needed here to test for partial row | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1356 visibility. MOUSE_FACE_P non-zero means compare the mouse_face_p |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1357 flags of A and B, too. */ |
25012 | 1358 |
1359 static INLINE int | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1360 row_equal_p (w, a, b, mouse_face_p) |
25012 | 1361 struct window *w; |
1362 struct glyph_row *a, *b; | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1363 int mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 1364 { |
1365 if (a == b) | |
1366 return 1; | |
1367 else if (a->hash != b->hash) | |
1368 return 0; | |
1369 else | |
1370 { | |
1371 struct glyph *a_glyph, *b_glyph, *a_end; | |
1372 int area; | |
1373 | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1374 if (mouse_face_p && a->mouse_face_p != b->mouse_face_p) |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1375 return 0; |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
1376 |
25012 | 1377 /* Compare glyphs. */ |
1378 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) | |
1379 { | |
1380 if (a->used[area] != b->used[area]) | |
1381 return 0; | |
1382 | |
1383 a_glyph = a->glyphs[area]; | |
1384 a_end = a_glyph + a->used[area]; | |
1385 b_glyph = b->glyphs[area]; | |
1386 | |
1387 while (a_glyph < a_end | |
1388 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (a_glyph, b_glyph)) | |
1389 ++a_glyph, ++b_glyph; | |
1390 | |
1391 if (a_glyph != a_end) | |
1392 return 0; | |
1393 } | |
1394 | |
1395 if (a->truncated_on_left_p != b->truncated_on_left_p | |
1396 || a->inverse_p != b->inverse_p | |
1397 || a->fill_line_p != b->fill_line_p | |
1398 || a->truncated_on_right_p != b->truncated_on_right_p | |
1399 || a->overlay_arrow_p != b->overlay_arrow_p | |
1400 || a->continued_p != b->continued_p | |
1401 || a->indicate_empty_line_p != b->indicate_empty_line_p | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1402 || a->overlapped_p != b->overlapped_p |
25012 | 1403 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (a) |
1404 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (b)) | |
1405 /* Different partially visible characters on left margin. */ | |
1406 || a->x != b->x | |
1407 /* Different height. */ | |
1408 || a->ascent != b->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1409 || a->phys_ascent != b->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1410 || a->phys_height != b->phys_height |
25012 | 1411 || a->visible_height != b->visible_height) |
1412 return 0; | |
1413 } | |
1414 | |
1415 return 1; | |
1416 } | |
1417 | |
1418 | |
314 | 1419 |
25012 | 1420 /*********************************************************************** |
1421 Glyph Pool | |
1422 | |
1423 See dispextern.h for an overall explanation of glyph pools. | |
1424 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1425 | |
1426 /* Allocate a glyph_pool structure. The structure returned is | |
1427 initialized with zeros. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1428 incremented for each pool allocated. */ | |
1429 | |
1430 static struct glyph_pool * | |
1431 new_glyph_pool () | |
1432 { | |
1433 struct glyph_pool *result; | |
1434 | |
1435 /* Allocate a new glyph_pool and clear it. */ | |
1436 result = (struct glyph_pool *) xmalloc (sizeof *result); | |
1437 bzero (result, sizeof *result); | |
1438 | |
1439 /* For memory leak and double deletion checking. */ | |
1440 ++glyph_pool_count; | |
1441 | |
1442 return result; | |
1443 } | |
1444 | |
1445 | |
1446 /* Free a glyph_pool structure POOL. The function may be called with | |
1447 a null POOL pointer. The global variable glyph_pool_count is | |
1448 decremented with every pool structure freed. If this count gets | |
1449 negative, more structures were freed than allocated, i.e. one | |
1450 structure must have been freed more than once or a bogus pointer | |
1451 was passed to free_glyph_pool. */ | |
1452 | |
1453 static void | |
1454 free_glyph_pool (pool) | |
1455 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1456 { | |
1457 if (pool) | |
1458 { | |
1459 /* More freed than allocated? */ | |
1460 --glyph_pool_count; | |
1461 xassert (glyph_pool_count >= 0); | |
1462 | |
1463 xfree (pool->glyphs); | |
1464 xfree (pool); | |
1465 } | |
1466 } | |
1467 | |
1468 | |
1469 /* Enlarge a glyph pool POOL. MATRIX_DIM gives the number of rows and | |
1470 columns we need. This function never shrinks a pool. The only | |
1471 case in which this would make sense, would be when a frame's size | |
1472 is changed from a large value to a smaller one. But, if someone | |
1473 does it once, we can expect that he will do it again. | |
1474 | |
1475 Value is non-zero if the pool changed in a way which makes | |
1476 re-adjusting window glyph matrices necessary. */ | |
1477 | |
1478 static int | |
1479 realloc_glyph_pool (pool, matrix_dim) | |
1480 struct glyph_pool *pool; | |
1481 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
1482 { | |
1483 int needed; | |
1484 int changed_p; | |
1485 | |
1486 changed_p = (pool->glyphs == 0 | |
1487 || matrix_dim.height != pool->nrows | |
1488 || matrix_dim.width != pool->ncolumns); | |
1489 | |
1490 /* Enlarge the glyph pool. */ | |
1491 needed = matrix_dim.width * matrix_dim.height; | |
1492 if (needed > pool->nglyphs) | |
1493 { | |
1494 int size = needed * sizeof (struct glyph); | |
1495 | |
1496 if (pool->glyphs) | |
1497 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xrealloc (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1498 else | |
1499 { | |
1500 pool->glyphs = (struct glyph *) xmalloc (size); | |
1501 bzero (pool->glyphs, size); | |
1502 } | |
1503 | |
1504 pool->nglyphs = needed; | |
1505 } | |
1506 | |
1507 /* Remember the number of rows and columns because (a) we use then | |
1508 to do sanity checks, and (b) the number of columns determines | |
1509 where rows in the frame matrix start---this must be available to | |
1510 determine pointers to rows of window sub-matrices. */ | |
1511 pool->nrows = matrix_dim.height; | |
1512 pool->ncolumns = matrix_dim.width; | |
1513 | |
1514 return changed_p; | |
1515 } | |
1516 | |
1517 | |
1518 | |
1519 /*********************************************************************** | |
1520 Debug Code | |
1521 ***********************************************************************/ | |
1522 | |
1523 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
1524 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1525 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1526 /* Flush standard output. This is sometimes useful to call from |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1527 the debugger. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1528 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1529 void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1530 flush_stdout () |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1531 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1532 fflush (stdout); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1533 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1534 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
1535 |
25012 | 1536 /* Check that no glyph pointers have been lost in MATRIX. If a |
1537 pointer has been lost, e.g. by using a structure assignment between | |
1538 rows, at least one pointer must occur more than once in the rows of | |
1539 MATRIX. */ | |
1540 | |
1541 void | |
1542 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix) | |
1543 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1544 { | |
1545 int i, j; | |
1546 | |
1547 for (i = 0; i < matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
1548 for (j = 0; j < matrix->nrows; ++j) | |
1549 xassert (i == j | |
1550 || (matrix->rows[i].glyphs[TEXT_AREA] | |
1551 != matrix->rows[j].glyphs[TEXT_AREA])); | |
1552 } | |
1553 | |
1554 | |
1555 /* Get a pointer to glyph row ROW in MATRIX, with bounds checks. */ | |
1556 | |
1557 struct glyph_row * | |
1558 matrix_row (matrix, row) | |
1559 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
1560 int row; | |
1561 { | |
1562 xassert (matrix && matrix->rows); | |
1563 xassert (row >= 0 && row < matrix->nrows); | |
1564 | |
1565 /* That's really too slow for normal testing because this function | |
1566 is called almost everywhere. Although---it's still astonishingly | |
1567 fast, so it is valuable to have for debugging purposes. */ | |
314 | 1568 #if 0 |
25012 | 1569 check_matrix_pointer_lossage (matrix); |
1570 #endif | |
1571 | |
1572 return matrix->rows + row; | |
1573 } | |
1574 | |
1575 | |
1576 #if 0 /* This function makes invalid assumptions when text is | |
1577 partially invisible. But it might come handy for debugging | |
1578 nevertheless. */ | |
1579 | |
1580 /* Check invariants that must hold for an up to date current matrix of | |
1581 window W. */ | |
1582 | |
1583 static void | |
1584 check_matrix_invariants (w) | |
314 | 1585 struct window *w; |
1586 { | |
25012 | 1587 struct glyph_matrix *matrix = w->current_matrix; |
1588 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
1589 struct glyph_row *row = matrix->rows; | |
1590 struct glyph_row *last_text_row = NULL; | |
1591 struct buffer *saved = current_buffer; | |
1592 struct buffer *buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
1593 int c; | |
1594 | |
1595 /* This can sometimes happen for a fresh window. */ | |
1596 if (matrix->nrows < 2) | |
1597 return; | |
1598 | |
1599 set_buffer_temp (buffer); | |
1600 | |
1601 /* Note: last row is always reserved for the mode line. */ | |
1602 while (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row) | |
1603 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) < yb) | |
1604 { | |
1605 struct glyph_row *next = row + 1; | |
1606 | |
1607 if (MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (row)) | |
1608 last_text_row = row; | |
1609 | |
1610 /* Check that character and byte positions are in sync. */ | |
1611 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1612 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1613 | |
1614 /* CHAR_TO_BYTE aborts when invoked for a position > Z. We can | |
1615 have such a position temporarily in case of a minibuffer | |
1616 displaying something like `[Sole completion]' at its end. */ | |
1617 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) < BUF_ZV (current_buffer)) | |
1618 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1619 == CHAR_TO_BYTE (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row))); | |
1620 | |
1621 /* Check that end position of `row' is equal to start position | |
1622 of next row. */ | |
1623 if (next->enabled_p && MATRIX_ROW_DISPLAYS_TEXT_P (next)) | |
1624 { | |
1625 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (row) | |
1626 == MATRIX_ROW_START_CHARPOS (next)); | |
1627 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row) | |
1628 == MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (next)); | |
1629 } | |
1630 row = next; | |
1631 } | |
1632 | |
1633 xassert (w->current_matrix->nrows == w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
1634 xassert (w->desired_matrix->rows != NULL); | |
1635 set_buffer_temp (saved); | |
1636 } | |
1637 | |
1638 #endif /* 0 */ | |
1639 | |
1640 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
1641 | |
1642 | |
1643 | |
1644 /********************************************************************** | |
1645 Allocating/ Adjusting Glyph Matrices | |
1646 **********************************************************************/ | |
1647 | |
1648 /* Allocate glyph matrices over a window tree for a frame-based | |
1649 redisplay | |
1650 | |
1651 X and Y are column/row within the frame glyph matrix where | |
1652 sub-matrices for the window tree rooted at WINDOW must be | |
1653 allocated. CH_DIM contains the dimensions of the smallest | |
1654 character that could be used during display. DIM_ONLY_P non-zero | |
1655 means that the caller of this function is only interested in the | |
1656 result matrix dimension, and matrix adjustments should not be | |
1657 performed. | |
1658 | |
1659 The function returns the total width/height of the sub-matrices of | |
1660 the window tree. If called on a frame root window, the computation | |
1661 will take the mini-buffer window into account. | |
1662 | |
1663 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS is set to a bit mask with bits | |
1664 | |
1665 NEW_LEAF_MATRIX set if any window in the tree did not have a | |
1666 glyph matrices yet, and | |
1667 | |
1668 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX set if the dimension or location of a matrix of | |
1669 any window in the tree will be changed or have been changed (see | |
1670 DIM_ONLY_P). | |
1671 | |
1672 *WINDOW_CHANGE_FLAGS must be initialized by the caller of this | |
1673 function. | |
1674 | |
1675 Windows are arranged into chains of windows on the same level | |
1676 through the next fields of window structures. Such a level can be | |
1677 either a sequence of horizontally adjacent windows from left to | |
1678 right, or a sequence of vertically adjacent windows from top to | |
1679 bottom. Each window in a horizontal sequence can be either a leaf | |
1680 window or a vertical sequence; a window in a vertical sequence can | |
1681 be either a leaf or a horizontal sequence. All windows in a | |
1682 horizontal sequence have the same height, and all windows in a | |
1683 vertical sequence have the same width. | |
1684 | |
1685 This function uses, for historical reasons, a more general | |
1686 algorithm to determine glyph matrix dimensions that would be | |
1687 necessary. | |
1688 | |
1689 The matrix height of a horizontal sequence is determined by the | |
1690 maximum height of any matrix in the sequence. The matrix width of | |
1691 a horizontal sequence is computed by adding up matrix widths of | |
1692 windows in the sequence. | |
1693 | |
1694 |<------- result width ------->| | |
1695 +---------+----------+---------+ --- | |
1696 | | | | | | |
1697 | | | | | |
1698 +---------+ | | result height | |
1699 | +---------+ | |
1700 | | | | |
1701 +----------+ --- | |
1702 | |
1703 The matrix width of a vertical sequence is the maximum matrix width | |
1704 of any window in the sequence. Its height is computed by adding up | |
1705 matrix heights of windows in the sequence. | |
1706 | |
1707 |<---- result width -->| | |
1708 +---------+ --- | |
1709 | | | | |
1710 | | | | |
1711 +---------+--+ | | |
1712 | | | | |
1713 | | result height | |
1714 | | | |
1715 +------------+---------+ | | |
1716 | | | | |
1717 | | | | |
1718 +------------+---------+ --- */ | |
1719 | |
1720 /* Bit indicating that a new matrix will be allocated or has been | |
1721 allocated. */ | |
1722 | |
1723 #define NEW_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 0) | |
1724 | |
1725 /* Bit indicating that a matrix will or has changed its location or | |
1726 size. */ | |
1727 | |
1728 #define CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX (1 << 1) | |
1729 | |
1730 static struct dim | |
1731 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (window, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1732 dim_only_p, window_change_flags) | |
1733 Lisp_Object window; | |
1734 int x, y; | |
1735 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1736 int dim_only_p; | |
1737 int *window_change_flags; | |
1738 { | |
1739 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (XWINDOW (window))); | |
1740 int x0 = x, y0 = y; | |
1741 int wmax = 0, hmax = 0; | |
1742 struct dim total; | |
1743 struct dim dim; | |
1744 struct window *w; | |
1745 int in_horz_combination_p; | |
1746 | |
1747 /* What combination is WINDOW part of? Compute this once since the | |
1748 result is the same for all windows in the `next' chain. The | |
1749 special case of a root window (parent equal to nil) is treated | |
1750 like a vertical combination because a root window's `next' | |
1751 points to the mini-buffer window, if any, which is arranged | |
1752 vertically below other windows. */ | |
1753 in_horz_combination_p | |
1754 = (!NILP (XWINDOW (window)->parent) | |
1755 && !NILP (XWINDOW (XWINDOW (window)->parent)->hchild)); | |
1756 | |
1757 /* For WINDOW and all windows on the same level. */ | |
1758 do | |
1759 { | |
1760 w = XWINDOW (window); | |
1761 | |
1762 /* Get the dimension of the window sub-matrix for W, depending | |
1763 on whether this a combination or a leaf window. */ | |
1764 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1765 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->hchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1766 dim_only_p, | |
1767 window_change_flags); | |
1768 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
1769 dim = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (w->vchild, x, y, ch_dim, | |
1770 dim_only_p, | |
1771 window_change_flags); | |
1772 else | |
1773 { | |
1774 /* If not already done, allocate sub-matrix structures. */ | |
1775 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
1776 { | |
1777 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
1778 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
1779 *window_change_flags |= NEW_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1780 } | |
1781 | |
1782 /* Width and height MUST be chosen so that there are no | |
1783 holes in the frame matrix. */ | |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1784 dim.width = XINT (w->width); |
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
1785 dim.height = XINT (w->height); |
25012 | 1786 |
1787 /* Will matrix be re-allocated? */ | |
1788 if (x != w->desired_matrix->matrix_x | |
1789 || y != w->desired_matrix->matrix_y | |
1790 || dim.width != w->desired_matrix->matrix_w | |
1791 || dim.height != w->desired_matrix->matrix_h | |
1792 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1793 w->right_margin_width) | |
1794 != w->desired_matrix->left_margin_glyphs) | |
1795 || (margin_glyphs_to_reserve (w, dim.width, | |
1796 w->left_margin_width) | |
1797 != w->desired_matrix->right_margin_glyphs)) | |
1798 *window_change_flags |= CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX; | |
1799 | |
1800 /* Actually change matrices, if allowed. Do not consider | |
1801 CHANGED_LEAF_MATRIX computed above here because the pool | |
1802 may have been changed which we don't now here. We trust | |
1803 that we only will be called with DIM_ONLY_P != 0 when | |
1804 necessary. */ | |
1805 if (!dim_only_p) | |
1806 { | |
1807 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1808 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, x, y, dim); | |
1809 } | |
1810 } | |
1811 | |
1812 /* If we are part of a horizontal combination, advance x for | |
1813 windows to the right of W; otherwise advance y for windows | |
1814 below W. */ | |
1815 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1816 x += dim.width; | |
1817 else | |
1818 y += dim.height; | |
1819 | |
1820 /* Remember maximum glyph matrix dimensions. */ | |
1821 wmax = max (wmax, dim.width); | |
1822 hmax = max (hmax, dim.height); | |
1823 | |
1824 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
1825 window = w->next; | |
1826 } | |
1827 while (!NILP (window)); | |
1828 | |
1829 /* Set `total' to the total glyph matrix dimension of this window | |
1830 level. In a vertical combination, the width is the width of the | |
1831 widest window; the height is the y we finally reached, corrected | |
1832 by the y we started with. In a horizontal combination, the total | |
1833 height is the height of the tallest window, and the width is the | |
1834 x we finally reached, corrected by the x we started with. */ | |
1835 if (in_horz_combination_p) | |
1836 { | |
1837 total.width = x - x0; | |
1838 total.height = hmax; | |
1839 } | |
1840 else | |
1841 { | |
1842 total.width = wmax; | |
1843 total.height = y - y0; | |
1844 } | |
1845 | |
1846 return total; | |
1847 } | |
1848 | |
1849 | |
1850 /* Allocate window matrices for window-based redisplay. W is the | |
1851 window whose matrices must be allocated/reallocated. CH_DIM is the | |
1852 size of the smallest character that could potentially be used on W. */ | |
1853 | |
1854 static void | |
1855 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim) | |
1856 struct window *w; | |
1857 struct dim ch_dim; | |
1858 { | |
1859 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
1860 | |
1861 while (w) | |
314 | 1862 { |
25012 | 1863 if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
1864 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->vchild), ch_dim); | |
1865 else if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
1866 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (w->hchild), ch_dim); | |
1867 else | |
314 | 1868 { |
25012 | 1869 /* W is a leaf window. */ |
1870 int window_pixel_width = XFLOATINT (w->width) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
1871 int window_pixel_height = window_box_height (w) + abs (w->vscroll); | |
1872 struct dim dim; | |
1873 | |
1874 /* If matrices are not yet allocated, allocate them now. */ | |
1875 if (w->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
314 | 1876 { |
25012 | 1877 w->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); |
1878 w->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (NULL); | |
314 | 1879 } |
25012 | 1880 |
1881 /* Compute number of glyphs needed in a glyph row. */ | |
1882 dim.width = (((window_pixel_width + ch_dim.width - 1) | |
1883 / ch_dim.width) | |
1884 /* 2 partially visible columns in the text area. */ | |
1885 + 2 | |
1886 /* One partially visible column at the right | |
1887 edge of each marginal area. */ | |
1888 + 1 + 1); | |
1889 | |
1890 /* Compute number of glyph rows needed. */ | |
1891 dim.height = (((window_pixel_height + ch_dim.height - 1) | |
1892 / ch_dim.height) | |
1893 /* One partially visible line at the top and | |
1894 bottom of the window. */ | |
1895 + 2 | |
1896 /* 2 for top and mode line. */ | |
1897 + 2); | |
1898 | |
1899 /* Change matrices. */ | |
1900 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->desired_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1901 adjust_glyph_matrix (w, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, dim); | |
1902 } | |
1903 | |
1904 w = NILP (w->next) ? NULL : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
1905 } | |
1906 } | |
1907 | |
1908 | |
1909 /* Re-allocate/ re-compute glyph matrices on frame F. If F is null, | |
1910 do it for all frames; otherwise do it just for the given frame. | |
1911 This function must be called when a new frame is created, its size | |
1912 changes, or its window configuration changes. */ | |
1913 | |
1914 void | |
1915 adjust_glyphs (f) | |
1916 struct frame *f; | |
1917 { | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1918 /* Block input so that expose events and other events that access |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1919 glyph matrices are not processed while we are changing them. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1920 BLOCK_INPUT; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1921 |
25012 | 1922 if (f) |
1923 adjust_frame_glyphs (f); | |
1924 else | |
1925 { | |
1926 Lisp_Object tail, lisp_frame; | |
1927 | |
1928 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, lisp_frame) | |
1929 adjust_frame_glyphs (XFRAME (lisp_frame)); | |
1930 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1931 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
1932 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 1933 } |
1934 | |
1935 | |
1936 /* Adjust frame glyphs when Emacs is initialized. | |
1937 | |
1938 To be called from init_display. | |
1939 | |
1940 We need a glyph matrix because redraw will happen soon. | |
1941 Unfortunately, window sizes on selected_frame are not yet set to | |
1942 meaningful values. I believe we can assume that there are only two | |
1943 windows on the frame---the mini-buffer and the root window. Frame | |
1944 height and width seem to be correct so far. So, set the sizes of | |
1945 windows to estimated values. */ | |
1946 | |
1947 static void | |
1948 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially () | |
1949 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1950 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1951 struct window *root = XWINDOW (sf->root_window); |
25012 | 1952 struct window *mini = XWINDOW (root->next); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1953 int frame_height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1954 int frame_width = FRAME_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1955 int top_margin = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (sf); |
25012 | 1956 |
1957 /* Do it for the root window. */ | |
1958 XSETFASTINT (root->top, top_margin); | |
1959 XSETFASTINT (root->width, frame_width); | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1960 set_window_height (sf->root_window, frame_height - 1 - top_margin, 0); |
25012 | 1961 |
1962 /* Do it for the mini-buffer window. */ | |
1963 XSETFASTINT (mini->top, frame_height - 1); | |
1964 XSETFASTINT (mini->width, frame_width); | |
1965 set_window_height (root->next, 1, 0); | |
1966 | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
1967 adjust_frame_glyphs (sf); |
25012 | 1968 glyphs_initialized_initially_p = 1; |
1969 } | |
1970 | |
1971 | |
1972 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F. */ | |
1973 | |
1974 static void | |
1975 adjust_frame_glyphs (f) | |
1976 struct frame *f; | |
1977 { | |
1978 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
1979 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f); | |
1980 else | |
1981 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f); | |
1982 | |
1983 /* Don't forget the message buffer and the buffer for | |
1984 decode_mode_spec. */ | |
1985 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f); | |
1986 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f); | |
1987 | |
1988 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 1; | |
1989 } | |
1990 | |
1991 | |
1992 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
1993 frame-based redisplay. */ | |
1994 | |
1995 static void | |
1996 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_frame_redisplay (f) | |
1997 struct frame *f; | |
1998 { | |
1999 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2000 struct dim matrix_dim; | |
2001 int pool_changed_p; | |
2002 int window_change_flags; | |
2003 int top_window_y; | |
2004 | |
2005 if (!FRAME_LIVE_P (f)) | |
2006 return; | |
2007 | |
2008 /* Determine the smallest character in any font for F. On | |
2009 console windows, all characters have dimension (1, 1). */ | |
2010 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2011 | |
2012 top_window_y = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); | |
2013 | |
2014 /* Allocate glyph pool structures if not already done. */ | |
2015 if (f->desired_pool == NULL) | |
2016 { | |
2017 f->desired_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
2018 f->current_pool = new_glyph_pool (); | |
2019 } | |
2020 | |
2021 /* Allocate frames matrix structures if needed. */ | |
2022 if (f->desired_matrix == NULL) | |
2023 { | |
2024 f->desired_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->desired_pool); | |
2025 f->current_matrix = new_glyph_matrix (f->current_pool); | |
2026 } | |
2027 | |
2028 /* Compute window glyph matrices. (This takes the mini-buffer | |
2029 window into account). The result is the size of the frame glyph | |
2030 matrix needed. The variable window_change_flags is set to a bit | |
2031 mask indicating whether new matrices will be allocated or | |
2032 existing matrices change their size or location within the frame | |
2033 matrix. */ | |
2034 window_change_flags = 0; | |
2035 matrix_dim | |
2036 = allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2037 0, top_window_y, | |
2038 ch_dim, 1, | |
2039 &window_change_flags); | |
2040 | |
2041 /* Add in menu bar lines, if any. */ | |
2042 matrix_dim.height += top_window_y; | |
2043 | |
2044 /* Enlarge pools as necessary. */ | |
2045 pool_changed_p = realloc_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2046 realloc_glyph_pool (f->current_pool, matrix_dim); | |
2047 | |
2048 /* Set up glyph pointers within window matrices. Do this only if | |
2049 absolutely necessary since it requires a frame redraw. */ | |
2050 if (pool_changed_p || window_change_flags) | |
2051 { | |
2052 /* Do it for window matrices. */ | |
2053 allocate_matrices_for_frame_redisplay (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
2054 0, top_window_y, ch_dim, 0, | |
2055 &window_change_flags); | |
2056 | |
2057 /* Size of frame matrices must equal size of frame. Note | |
2058 that we are called for X frames with window widths NOT equal | |
2059 to the frame width (from CHANGE_FRAME_SIZE_1). */ | |
2060 xassert (matrix_dim.width == FRAME_WIDTH (f) | |
2061 && matrix_dim.height == FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
2062 | |
2063 /* Resize frame matrices. */ | |
2064 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->desired_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2065 adjust_glyph_matrix (NULL, f->current_matrix, 0, 0, matrix_dim); | |
2066 | |
2067 /* Since location and size of sub-matrices within the pool may | |
2068 have changed, and current matrices don't have meaningful | |
2069 contents anymore, mark the frame garbaged. */ | |
2070 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
2071 } | |
2072 } | |
2073 | |
2074 | |
2075 /* Allocate/reallocate glyph matrices of a single frame F for | |
2076 window-based redisplay. */ | |
2077 | |
2078 static void | |
2079 adjust_frame_glyphs_for_window_redisplay (f) | |
2080 struct frame *f; | |
2081 { | |
2082 struct dim ch_dim; | |
2083 struct window *w; | |
2084 | |
2085 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f) && FRAME_LIVE_P (f)); | |
2086 | |
2087 /* Get minimum sizes. */ | |
2088 #ifdef HAVE_WINDOW_SYSTEM | |
2089 ch_dim.width = FRAME_SMALLEST_CHAR_WIDTH (f); | |
2090 ch_dim.height = FRAME_SMALLEST_FONT_HEIGHT (f); | |
2091 #else | |
2092 ch_dim.width = ch_dim.height = 1; | |
2093 #endif | |
2094 | |
2095 /* Allocate/reallocate window matrices. */ | |
2096 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), | |
2097 ch_dim); | |
2098 | |
2099 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the dummy window used to display | |
2100 the menu bar under X when no X toolkit support is available. */ | |
2101 #ifndef USE_X_TOOLKIT | |
2102 { | |
2103 /* Allocate a dummy window if not already done. */ | |
2104 if (NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2105 { | |
2106 f->menu_bar_window = make_window (); | |
2107 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2108 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); | |
2109 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2110 } | |
2111 else | |
2112 w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2113 | |
2114 /* Set window dimensions to frame dimensions and allocate or | |
2115 adjust glyph matrices of W. */ | |
2116 XSETFASTINT (w->top, 0); | |
2117 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
2118 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2119 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); | |
2120 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2121 } | |
2122 #endif /* not USE_X_TOOLKIT */ | |
2123 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2124 /* Allocate/ reallocate matrices of the tool bar window. If we |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2125 don't have a tool bar window yet, make one. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2126 if (NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2127 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2128 f->tool_bar_window = make_window (); |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2129 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2130 XSETFRAME (w->frame, f); |
2131 w->pseudo_window_p = 1; | |
2132 } | |
2133 else | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2134 w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2135 |
2136 XSETFASTINT (w->top, FRAME_MENU_BAR_LINES (f)); | |
2137 XSETFASTINT (w->left, 0); | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2138 XSETFASTINT (w->height, FRAME_TOOL_BAR_LINES (f)); |
25012 | 2139 XSETFASTINT (w->width, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)); |
2140 allocate_matrices_for_window_redisplay (w, ch_dim); | |
2141 } | |
2142 | |
2143 | |
2144 /* Adjust/ allocate message buffer of frame F. | |
2145 | |
2146 Note that the message buffer is never freed. Since I could not | |
2147 find a free in 19.34, I assume that freeing it would be | |
2148 problematic in some way and don't do it either. | |
2149 | |
2150 (Implementation note: It should be checked if we can free it | |
2151 eventually without causing trouble). */ | |
2152 | |
2153 static void | |
2154 adjust_frame_message_buffer (f) | |
2155 struct frame *f; | |
2156 { | |
2157 int size = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1; | |
2158 | |
2159 if (FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f)) | |
2160 { | |
2161 char *buffer = FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f); | |
2162 char *new_buffer = (char *) xrealloc (buffer, size); | |
2163 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = new_buffer; | |
2164 } | |
2165 else | |
2166 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF (f) = (char *) xmalloc (size); | |
2167 } | |
2168 | |
2169 | |
2170 /* Re-allocate buffer for decode_mode_spec on frame F. */ | |
2171 | |
2172 static void | |
2173 adjust_decode_mode_spec_buffer (f) | |
2174 struct frame *f; | |
2175 { | |
2176 f->decode_mode_spec_buffer | |
2177 = (char *) xrealloc (f->decode_mode_spec_buffer, | |
2178 FRAME_MESSAGE_BUF_SIZE (f) + 1); | |
2179 } | |
2180 | |
2181 | |
2182 | |
2183 /********************************************************************** | |
2184 Freeing Glyph Matrices | |
2185 **********************************************************************/ | |
2186 | |
2187 /* Free glyph memory for a frame F. F may be null. This function can | |
2188 be called for the same frame more than once. The root window of | |
2189 F may be nil when this function is called. This is the case when | |
2190 the function is called when F is destroyed. */ | |
2191 | |
2192 void | |
2193 free_glyphs (f) | |
2194 struct frame *f; | |
2195 { | |
2196 if (f && f->glyphs_initialized_p) | |
2197 { | |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2198 /* Block interrupt input so that we don't get surprised by an X |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2199 event while we're in an inconsistent state. */ |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2200 BLOCK_INPUT; |
25012 | 2201 f->glyphs_initialized_p = 0; |
2202 | |
2203 /* Release window sub-matrices. */ | |
2204 if (!NILP (f->root_window)) | |
2205 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (f->root_window)); | |
2206 | |
2207 /* Free the dummy window for menu bars without X toolkit and its | |
2208 glyph matrices. */ | |
2209 if (!NILP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
2210 { | |
2211 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window); | |
2212 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2213 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2214 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2215 f->menu_bar_window = Qnil; | |
2216 } | |
2217 | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2218 /* Free the tool bar window and its glyph matrices. */ |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2219 if (!NILP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 2220 { |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2221 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 2222 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); |
2223 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2224 w->desired_matrix = w->current_matrix = NULL; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
2225 f->tool_bar_window = Qnil; |
25012 | 2226 } |
2227 | |
2228 /* Release frame glyph matrices. Reset fields to zero in | |
2229 case we are called a second time. */ | |
2230 if (f->desired_matrix) | |
2231 { | |
2232 free_glyph_matrix (f->desired_matrix); | |
2233 free_glyph_matrix (f->current_matrix); | |
2234 f->desired_matrix = f->current_matrix = NULL; | |
2235 } | |
2236 | |
2237 /* Release glyph pools. */ | |
2238 if (f->desired_pool) | |
2239 { | |
2240 free_glyph_pool (f->desired_pool); | |
2241 free_glyph_pool (f->current_pool); | |
2242 f->desired_pool = f->current_pool = NULL; | |
314 | 2243 } |
27968
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2244 |
7634011b93f3
(free_glyphs): Block input while freeing matrices.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27855
diff
changeset
|
2245 UNBLOCK_INPUT; |
314 | 2246 } |
2247 } | |
2248 | |
25012 | 2249 |
2250 /* Free glyph sub-matrices in the window tree rooted at W. This | |
2251 function may be called with a null pointer, and it may be called on | |
2252 the same tree more than once. */ | |
2253 | |
2254 void | |
2255 free_window_matrices (w) | |
2256 struct window *w; | |
2257 { | |
2258 while (w) | |
2259 { | |
2260 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2261 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2262 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2263 free_window_matrices (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2264 else | |
2265 { | |
2266 /* This is a leaf window. Free its memory and reset fields | |
2267 to zero in case this function is called a second time for | |
2268 W. */ | |
2269 free_glyph_matrix (w->current_matrix); | |
2270 free_glyph_matrix (w->desired_matrix); | |
2271 w->current_matrix = w->desired_matrix = NULL; | |
2272 } | |
2273 | |
2274 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2275 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2276 } | |
2277 } | |
2278 | |
2279 | |
2280 /* Check glyph memory leaks. This function is called from | |
2281 shut_down_emacs. Note that frames are not destroyed when Emacs | |
2282 exits. We therefore free all glyph memory for all active frames | |
2283 explicitly and check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2284 |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2285 void |
25012 | 2286 check_glyph_memory () |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2287 { |
25012 | 2288 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
2289 | |
2290 /* Free glyph memory for all frames. */ | |
2291 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
2292 free_glyphs (XFRAME (frame)); | |
2293 | |
2294 /* Check that nothing is left allocated. */ | |
2295 if (glyph_matrix_count) | |
2296 abort (); | |
2297 if (glyph_pool_count) | |
2298 abort (); | |
2299 } | |
2300 | |
2301 | |
2302 | |
2303 /********************************************************************** | |
2304 Building a Frame Matrix | |
2305 **********************************************************************/ | |
2306 | |
2307 /* Most of the redisplay code works on glyph matrices attached to | |
2308 windows. This is a good solution most of the time, but it is not | |
2309 suitable for terminal code. Terminal output functions cannot rely | |
2310 on being able to set an arbitrary terminal window. Instead they | |
2311 must be provided with a view of the whole frame, i.e. the whole | |
2312 screen. We build such a view by constructing a frame matrix from | |
2313 window matrices in this section. | |
2314 | |
2315 Windows that must be updated have their must_be_update_p flag set. | |
2316 For all such windows, their desired matrix is made part of the | |
2317 desired frame matrix. For other windows, their current matrix is | |
2318 made part of the desired frame matrix. | |
2319 | |
2320 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2321 | desired | desired | | |
2322 | | | | |
2323 +-----------------+----------------+ | |
2324 | current | | |
2325 | | | |
2326 +----------------------------------+ | |
2327 | |
2328 Desired window matrices can be made part of the frame matrix in a | |
2329 cheap way: We exploit the fact that the desired frame matrix and | |
2330 desired window matrices share their glyph memory. This is not | |
2331 possible for current window matrices. Their glyphs are copied to | |
2332 the desired frame matrix. The latter is equivalent to | |
2333 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. | |
2334 | |
2335 Used glyphs counters for frame matrix rows are the result of adding | |
2336 up glyph lengths of the window matrices. A line in the frame | |
2337 matrix is enabled, if a corresponding line in a window matrix is | |
2338 enabled. | |
2339 | |
2340 After building the desired frame matrix, it will be passed to | |
2341 terminal code, which will manipulate both the desired and current | |
2342 frame matrix. Changes applied to the frame's current matrix have | |
2343 to be visible in current window matrices afterwards, of course. | |
2344 | |
2345 This problem is solved like this: | |
2346 | |
2347 1. Window and frame matrices share glyphs. Window matrices are | |
2348 constructed in a way that their glyph contents ARE the glyph | |
2349 contents needed in a frame matrix. Thus, any modification of | |
2350 glyphs done in terminal code will be reflected in window matrices | |
2351 automatically. | |
2352 | |
2353 2. Exchanges of rows in a frame matrix done by terminal code are | |
2354 intercepted by hook functions so that corresponding row operations | |
2355 on window matrices can be performed. This is necessary because we | |
2356 use pointers to glyphs in glyph row structures. To satisfy the | |
2357 assumption of point 1 above that glyphs are updated implicitly in | |
2358 window matrices when they are manipulated via the frame matrix, | |
2359 window and frame matrix must of course agree where to find the | |
2360 glyphs for their rows. Possible manipulations that must be | |
2361 mirrored are assignments of rows of the desired frame matrix to the | |
2362 current frame matrix and scrolling the current frame matrix. */ | |
2363 | |
2364 /* Build frame F's desired matrix from window matrices. Only windows | |
2365 which have the flag must_be_updated_p set have to be updated. Menu | |
2366 bar lines of a frame are not covered by window matrices, so make | |
2367 sure not to touch them in this function. */ | |
2368 | |
2369 static void | |
2370 build_frame_matrix (f) | |
2371 struct frame *f; | |
2372 { | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2373 int i; |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2374 |
25012 | 2375 /* F must have a frame matrix when this function is called. */ |
2376 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
2377 | |
2378 /* Clear all rows in the frame matrix covered by window matrices. | |
2379 Menu bar lines are not covered by windows. */ | |
2380 for (i = FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f); i < f->desired_matrix->nrows; ++i) | |
2381 clear_glyph_row (MATRIX_ROW (f->desired_matrix, i)); | |
2382 | |
2383 /* Build the matrix by walking the window tree. */ | |
2384 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (f->desired_matrix, | |
2385 XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))); | |
2386 } | |
2387 | |
2388 | |
2389 /* Walk a window tree, building a frame matrix MATRIX from window | |
2390 matrices. W is the root of a window tree. */ | |
2391 | |
2392 static void | |
2393 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, w) | |
2394 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2395 struct window *w; | |
2396 { | |
2397 while (w) | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2398 { |
25012 | 2399 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
2400 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2401 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2402 build_frame_matrix_from_window_tree (matrix, XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2403 else | |
2404 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (matrix, w); | |
2405 | |
2406 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6620
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2407 } |
990d7d5095dc
(adjust_window_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6617
diff
changeset
|
2408 } |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2409 |
25012 | 2410 |
2411 /* Add a window's matrix to a frame matrix. FRAME_MATRIX is the | |
2412 desired frame matrix built. W is a leaf window whose desired or | |
2413 current matrix is to be added to FRAME_MATRIX. W's flag | |
2414 must_be_updated_p determines which matrix it contributes to | |
2415 FRAME_MATRIX. If must_be_updated_p is non-zero, W's desired matrix | |
2416 is added to FRAME_MATRIX, otherwise W's current matrix is added. | |
2417 Adding a desired matrix means setting up used counters and such in | |
2418 frame rows, while adding a current window matrix to FRAME_MATRIX | |
2419 means copying glyphs. The latter case corresponds to | |
2420 preserve_other_columns in the old redisplay. */ | |
2421 | |
2422 static void | |
2423 build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window (frame_matrix, w) | |
2424 struct glyph_matrix *frame_matrix; | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2425 struct window *w; |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2426 { |
25012 | 2427 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix; |
2428 int window_y, frame_y; | |
2429 /* If non-zero, a glyph to insert at the right border of W. */ | |
2430 GLYPH right_border_glyph = 0; | |
2431 | |
2432 /* Set window_matrix to the matrix we have to add to FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2433 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
2434 { | |
2435 window_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
2436 | |
2437 /* Decide whether we want to add a vertical border glyph. */ | |
2438 if (!WINDOW_RIGHTMOST_P (w)) | |
2439 { | |
2440 struct Lisp_Char_Table *dp = window_display_table (w); | |
2441 right_border_glyph = (dp && INTEGERP (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2442 ? XINT (DISP_BORDER_GLYPH (dp)) | |
2443 : '|'); | |
2444 } | |
2445 } | |
2446 else | |
2447 window_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
2448 | |
2449 /* For all rows in the window matrix and corresponding rows in the | |
2450 frame matrix. */ | |
2451 window_y = 0; | |
2452 frame_y = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2453 while (window_y < window_matrix->nrows) | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2454 { |
25012 | 2455 struct glyph_row *frame_row = frame_matrix->rows + frame_y; |
2456 struct glyph_row *window_row = window_matrix->rows + window_y; | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2457 int current_row_p = window_matrix == w->current_matrix; |
25012 | 2458 |
2459 /* Fill up the frame row with spaces up to the left margin of the | |
2460 window row. */ | |
2461 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (frame_row, window_matrix->matrix_x); | |
2462 | |
2463 /* Fill up areas in the window matrix row with spaces. */ | |
2464 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (window_row); | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2465 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2466 /* If only part of W's desired matrix has been built, and |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2467 window_row wasn't displayed, use the corresponding current |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2468 row instead. */ |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2469 if (window_matrix == w->desired_matrix |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2470 && !window_row->enabled_p) |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2471 { |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2472 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows + window_y; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2473 current_row_p = 1; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2474 } |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2475 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2476 if (current_row_p) |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2477 { |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2478 /* Copy window row to frame row. */ |
25012 | 2479 bcopy (window_row->glyphs[0], |
2480 frame_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + window_matrix->matrix_x, | |
2481 window_matrix->matrix_w * sizeof (struct glyph)); | |
2482 } | |
2483 else | |
2484 { | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2485 xassert (window_row->enabled_p); |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2486 |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2487 /* Only when a desired row has been displayed, we want |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2488 the corresponding frame row to be updated. */ |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2489 frame_row->enabled_p = 1; |
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2490 |
25012 | 2491 /* Maybe insert a vertical border between horizontally adjacent |
2492 windows. */ | |
2493 if (right_border_glyph) | |
2494 { | |
2495 struct glyph *border = window_row->glyphs[LAST_AREA] - 1; | |
2496 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (*border, right_border_glyph); | |
2497 } | |
2498 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2499 #if 0 /* This shouldn't be necessary. Let's check it. */ |
25012 | 2500 /* Due to hooks installed, it normally doesn't happen that |
2501 window rows and frame rows of the same matrix are out of | |
2502 sync, i.e. have a different understanding of where to | |
2503 find glyphs for the row. The following is a safety-belt | |
2504 that doesn't cost much and makes absolutely sure that | |
2505 window and frame matrices are in sync. */ | |
2506 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2507 { |
25012 | 2508 /* Find the row in the window being a slice. There |
2509 should exist one from program logic. */ | |
2510 struct glyph_row *slice_row | |
2511 = find_glyph_row_slice (window_matrix, frame_matrix, frame_y); | |
2512 xassert (slice_row != 0); | |
2513 | |
2514 /* Exchange glyphs between both window rows. */ | |
2515 swap_glyphs_in_rows (window_row, slice_row); | |
2516 | |
2517 /* Exchange pointers between both rows. */ | |
2518 swap_glyph_pointers (window_row, slice_row); | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2519 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2520 #endif |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2521 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2522 /* Window row window_y must be a slice of frame row |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2523 frame_y. */ |
25012 | 2524 xassert (glyph_row_slice_p (window_row, frame_row)); |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2525 |
25012 | 2526 /* If rows are in sync, we don't have to copy glyphs because |
2527 frame and window share glyphs. */ | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2528 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2529 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2530 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2531 #endif |
25012 | 2532 } |
2533 | |
2534 /* Set number of used glyphs in the frame matrix. Since we fill | |
2535 up with spaces, and visit leaf windows from left to right it | |
2536 can be done simply. */ | |
2537 frame_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
2538 = window_matrix->matrix_x + window_matrix->matrix_w; | |
2539 | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
2540 /* Or in other flags. */ |
25012 | 2541 frame_row->inverse_p |= window_row->inverse_p; |
2542 | |
2543 /* Next row. */ | |
2544 ++window_y; | |
2545 ++frame_y; | |
2546 } | |
2547 } | |
2548 | |
2549 | |
2550 /* Add spaces to a glyph row ROW in a window matrix. | |
2551 | |
2552 Each row has the form: | |
2553 | |
2554 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2555 | left | text | right | | |
2556 +---------+-----------------------------+------------+ | |
2557 | |
2558 Left and right marginal areas are optional. This function adds | |
2559 spaces to areas so that there are no empty holes between areas. | |
2560 In other words: If the right area is not empty, the text area | |
2561 is filled up with spaces up to the right area. If the text area | |
2562 is not empty, the left area is filled up. | |
2563 | |
2564 To be called for frame-based redisplay, only. */ | |
2565 | |
2566 static void | |
2567 fill_up_glyph_row_with_spaces (row) | |
2568 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2569 { | |
2570 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2571 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, TEXT_AREA); | |
2572 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); | |
2573 } | |
2574 | |
2575 | |
2576 /* Fill area AREA of glyph row ROW with spaces. To be called for | |
2577 frame-based redisplay only. */ | |
2578 | |
2579 static void | |
2580 fill_up_glyph_row_area_with_spaces (row, area) | |
2581 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2582 int area; | |
2583 { | |
2584 if (row->glyphs[area] < row->glyphs[area + 1]) | |
2585 { | |
2586 struct glyph *end = row->glyphs[area + 1]; | |
2587 struct glyph *text = row->glyphs[area] + row->used[area]; | |
2588 | |
2589 while (text < end) | |
2590 *text++ = space_glyph; | |
2591 row->used[area] = text - row->glyphs[area]; | |
2592 } | |
2593 } | |
2594 | |
2595 | |
2596 /* Add spaces to the end of ROW in a frame matrix until index UPTO is | |
2597 reached. In frame matrices only one area, TEXT_AREA, is used. */ | |
2598 | |
2599 static void | |
2600 fill_up_frame_row_with_spaces (row, upto) | |
2601 struct glyph_row *row; | |
2602 int upto; | |
2603 { | |
2604 int i = row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2605 struct glyph *glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
2606 | |
2607 while (i < upto) | |
2608 glyph[i++] = space_glyph; | |
2609 | |
2610 row->used[TEXT_AREA] = i; | |
2611 } | |
2612 | |
2613 | |
2614 | |
2615 /********************************************************************** | |
2616 Mirroring operations on frame matrices in window matrices | |
2617 **********************************************************************/ | |
2618 | |
2619 /* Set frame being updated via frame-based redisplay to F. This | |
2620 function must be called before updates to make explicit that we are | |
2621 working on frame matrices or not. */ | |
2622 | |
2623 static INLINE void | |
2624 set_frame_matrix_frame (f) | |
2625 struct frame *f; | |
2626 { | |
2627 frame_matrix_frame = f; | |
2628 } | |
2629 | |
2630 | |
2631 /* Make sure glyph row ROW in CURRENT_MATRIX is up to date. | |
2632 DESIRED_MATRIX is the desired matrix corresponding to | |
2633 CURRENT_MATRIX. The update is done by exchanging glyph pointers | |
2634 between rows in CURRENT_MATRIX and DESIRED_MATRIX. If | |
2635 frame_matrix_frame is non-null, this indicates that the exchange is | |
2636 done in frame matrices, and that we have to perform analogous | |
2637 operations in window matrices of frame_matrix_frame. */ | |
2638 | |
2639 static INLINE void | |
2640 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, row) | |
2641 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix, *current_matrix; | |
2642 int row; | |
2643 { | |
2644 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, row); | |
2645 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, row); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
2646 int mouse_face_p = current_row->mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 2647 |
2648 /* Do current_row = desired_row. This exchanges glyph pointers | |
2649 between both rows, and does a structure assignment otherwise. */ | |
2650 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); | |
2651 | |
2652 /* Enable current_row to mark it as valid. */ | |
2653 current_row->enabled_p = 1; | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
2654 current_row->mouse_face_p = mouse_face_p; |
25012 | 2655 |
2656 /* If we are called on frame matrices, perform analogous operations | |
2657 for window matrices. */ | |
2658 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2659 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), row); | |
2660 } | |
2661 | |
2662 | |
2663 /* W is the root of a window tree. FRAME_ROW is the index of a row in | |
2664 W's frame which has been made current (by swapping pointers between | |
2665 current and desired matrix). Perform analogous operations in the | |
2666 matrices of leaf windows in the window tree rooted at W. */ | |
2667 | |
2668 static void | |
2669 mirror_make_current (w, frame_row) | |
2670 struct window *w; | |
2671 int frame_row; | |
2672 { | |
2673 while (w) | |
2674 { | |
2675 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2676 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->hchild), frame_row); | |
2677 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2678 mirror_make_current (XWINDOW (w->vchild), frame_row); | |
2679 else | |
2680 { | |
2681 /* Row relative to window W. Don't use FRAME_TO_WINDOW_VPOS | |
2682 here because the checks performed in debug mode there | |
2683 will not allow the conversion. */ | |
2684 int row = frame_row - w->desired_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2685 | |
2686 /* If FRAME_ROW is within W, assign the desired row to the | |
2687 current row (exchanging glyph pointers). */ | |
2688 if (row >= 0 && row < w->desired_matrix->matrix_h) | |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2689 { |
25012 | 2690 struct glyph_row *current_row |
2691 = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, row); | |
2692 struct glyph_row *desired_row | |
2693 = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, row); | |
25241
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2694 |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2695 if (desired_row->enabled_p) |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2696 assign_row (current_row, desired_row); |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2697 else |
35674d7c4136
(mirror_make_current): If desired row isn't enabled,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25190
diff
changeset
|
2698 swap_glyph_pointers (desired_row, current_row); |
25012 | 2699 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
6682
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2700 } |
16ab14205588
(verify_charstarts): Handle truncation of lines.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6648
diff
changeset
|
2701 } |
25012 | 2702 |
2703 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
6642
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2704 } |
2fda5dd17356
(verify_charstarts): New function.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
6627
diff
changeset
|
2705 } |
25012 | 2706 |
2707 | |
2708 /* Perform row dance after scrolling. We are working on the range of | |
2709 lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not | |
2710 including) in MATRIX. COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each | |
2711 row I in the range 0 <= I < NLINES, the index of the original line | |
2712 to move to I. This index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= | |
2713 index < NLINES. RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each | |
2714 row 0 <= I < NLINES which is empty. | |
2715 | |
2716 This function is called from do_scrolling and do_direct_scrolling. */ | |
2717 | |
2718 void | |
2719 mirrored_line_dance (matrix, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, | |
2720 retained_p) | |
2721 struct glyph_matrix *matrix; | |
2722 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2723 int *copy_from; | |
2724 char *retained_p; | |
2725 { | |
2726 /* A copy of original rows. */ | |
2727 struct glyph_row *old_rows; | |
2728 | |
2729 /* Rows to assign to. */ | |
2730 struct glyph_row *new_rows = MATRIX_ROW (matrix, unchanged_at_top); | |
2731 | |
2732 int i; | |
2733 | |
2734 /* Make a copy of the original rows. */ | |
2735 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2736 bcopy (new_rows, old_rows, nlines * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2737 | |
2738 /* Assign new rows, maybe clear lines. */ | |
2739 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2740 { | |
2741 int enabled_before_p = new_rows[i].enabled_p; | |
2742 | |
2743 xassert (i + unchanged_at_top < matrix->nrows); | |
2744 xassert (unchanged_at_top + copy_from[i] < matrix->nrows); | |
2745 new_rows[i] = old_rows[copy_from[i]]; | |
2746 new_rows[i].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2747 | |
2748 /* RETAINED_P is zero for empty lines. */ | |
2749 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2750 new_rows[i].enabled_p = 0; | |
2751 } | |
2752 | |
2753 /* Do the same for window matrices, if MATRIX Is a frame matrix. */ | |
2754 if (frame_matrix_frame) | |
2755 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (frame_matrix_frame->root_window), | |
2756 unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2757 } | |
2758 | |
2759 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2760 /* Synchronize glyph pointers in the current matrix of window W with |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2761 the current frame matrix. W must be full-width, and be on a tty |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2762 frame. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2763 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2764 static void |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2765 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2766 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2767 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2768 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2769 struct glyph_row *window_row, *window_row_end, *frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2770 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2771 /* Preconditions: W must be a leaf window and full-width. Its frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2772 must have a frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2773 xassert (NILP (w->hchild) && NILP (w->vchild)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2774 xassert (WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2775 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2776 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2777 /* If W is a full-width window, glyph pointers in W's current matrix |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2778 have, by definition, to be the same as glyph pointers in the |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2779 corresponding frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2780 window_row = w->current_matrix->rows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2781 window_row_end = window_row + w->current_matrix->nrows; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2782 frame_row = f->current_matrix->rows + XFASTINT (w->top); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2783 while (window_row < window_row_end) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2784 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2785 int area; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2786 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2787 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area <= LAST_AREA; ++area) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2788 window_row->glyphs[area] = frame_row->glyphs[area]; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2789 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2790 ++window_row, ++frame_row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2791 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2792 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2793 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2794 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2795 /* Return the window in the window tree rooted in W containing frame |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2796 row ROW. Value is null if none is found. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2797 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2798 struct window * |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2799 frame_row_to_window (w, row) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2800 struct window *w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2801 int row; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2802 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2803 struct window *found = NULL; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2804 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2805 while (w && !found) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2806 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2807 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2808 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->hchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2809 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2810 found = frame_row_to_window (XWINDOW (w->vchild), row); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2811 else if (row >= XFASTINT (w->top) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2812 && row < XFASTINT (w->top) + XFASTINT (w->height)) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2813 found = w; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2814 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2815 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2816 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2817 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2818 return found; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2819 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2820 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2821 |
25012 | 2822 /* Perform a line dance in the window tree rooted at W, after |
2823 scrolling a frame matrix in mirrored_line_dance. | |
2824 | |
2825 We are working on the range of lines UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + 1 to | |
2826 UNCHANGED_AT_TOP + NLINES (not including) in W's frame matrix. | |
2827 COPY_FROM is a vector containing, for each row I in the range 0 <= | |
2828 I < NLINES, the index of the original line to move to I. This | |
2829 index is relative to the row range, i.e. 0 <= index < NLINES. | |
2830 RETAINED_P is a vector containing zero for each row 0 <= I < NLINES | |
2831 which is empty. */ | |
2832 | |
2833 static void | |
2834 mirror_line_dance (w, unchanged_at_top, nlines, copy_from, retained_p) | |
2835 struct window *w; | |
2836 int unchanged_at_top, nlines; | |
2837 int *copy_from; | |
2838 char *retained_p; | |
2839 { | |
2840 while (w) | |
2841 { | |
2842 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2843 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->hchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2844 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2845 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2846 mirror_line_dance (XWINDOW (w->vchild), unchanged_at_top, | |
2847 nlines, copy_from, retained_p); | |
2848 else | |
2849 { | |
2850 /* W is a leaf window, and we are working on its current | |
2851 matrix m. */ | |
2852 struct glyph_matrix *m = w->current_matrix; | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2853 int i, sync_p = 0; |
25012 | 2854 struct glyph_row *old_rows; |
2855 | |
2856 /* Make a copy of the original rows of matrix m. */ | |
2857 old_rows = (struct glyph_row *) alloca (m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2858 bcopy (m->rows, old_rows, m->nrows * sizeof *old_rows); | |
2859 | |
2860 for (i = 0; i < nlines; ++i) | |
2861 { | |
2862 /* Frame relative line assigned to. */ | |
2863 int frame_to = i + unchanged_at_top; | |
2864 | |
2865 /* Frame relative line assigned. */ | |
2866 int frame_from = copy_from[i] + unchanged_at_top; | |
2867 | |
2868 /* Window relative line assigned to. */ | |
2869 int window_to = frame_to - m->matrix_y; | |
2870 | |
2871 /* Window relative line assigned. */ | |
2872 int window_from = frame_from - m->matrix_y; | |
2873 | |
2874 /* Is assigned line inside window? */ | |
2875 int from_inside_window_p | |
2876 = window_from >= 0 && window_from < m->matrix_h; | |
2877 | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2878 /* Is assigned to line inside window? */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2879 int to_inside_window_p |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2880 = window_to >= 0 && window_to < m->matrix_h; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2881 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2882 if (from_inside_window_p && to_inside_window_p) |
25012 | 2883 { |
2884 /* Enabled setting before assignment. */ | |
2885 int enabled_before_p; | |
2886 | |
2887 /* Do the assignment. The enabled_p flag is saved | |
2888 over the assignment because the old redisplay did | |
2889 that. */ | |
2890 enabled_before_p = m->rows[window_to].enabled_p; | |
2891 m->rows[window_to] = old_rows[window_from]; | |
2892 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = enabled_before_p; | |
2893 | |
2894 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ | |
2895 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) | |
2896 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; | |
2897 } | |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2898 else if (to_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2899 { |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2900 /* A copy between windows. This is an infrequent |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2901 case not worth optimizing. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2902 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2903 struct window *root = XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2904 struct window *w2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2905 struct glyph_matrix *m2; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2906 int m2_from; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2907 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2908 w2 = frame_row_to_window (root, frame_to); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2909 m2 = w2->current_matrix; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2910 m2_from = frame_from - m2->matrix_y; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2911 copy_row_except_pointers (m->rows + window_to, |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2912 m2->rows + m2_from); |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2913 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2914 /* If frame line is empty, window line is empty, too. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2915 if (!retained_p[copy_from[i]]) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2916 m->rows[window_to].enabled_p = 0; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2917 sync_p = 1; |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2918 } |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2919 else if (from_inside_window_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2920 sync_p = 1; |
25012 | 2921 } |
27855
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2922 |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2923 /* If there was a copy between windows, make sure glyph |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2924 pointers are in sync with the frame matrix. */ |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2925 if (sync_p) |
ecfe912fd73c
(flush_stdout) [GLYPH_DEBUG]: New function.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27727
diff
changeset
|
2926 sync_window_with_frame_matrix_rows (w); |
25012 | 2927 |
2928 /* Check that no pointers are lost. */ | |
2929 CHECK_MATRIX (m); | |
2930 } | |
2931 | |
2932 /* Next window on same level. */ | |
2933 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2934 } | |
2935 } | |
2936 | |
2937 | |
2938 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
2939 | |
2940 /* Check that window and frame matrices agree about their | |
2941 understanding where glyphs of the rows are to find. For each | |
2942 window in the window tree rooted at W, check that rows in the | |
2943 matrices of leaf window agree with their frame matrices about | |
2944 glyph pointers. */ | |
314 | 2945 |
21514 | 2946 void |
25012 | 2947 check_window_matrix_pointers (w) |
314 | 2948 struct window *w; |
2949 { | |
25012 | 2950 while (w) |
2951 { | |
2952 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
2953 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->hchild)); | |
2954 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
2955 check_window_matrix_pointers (XWINDOW (w->vchild)); | |
2956 else | |
2957 { | |
2958 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
2959 check_matrix_pointers (w->desired_matrix, f->desired_matrix); | |
2960 check_matrix_pointers (w->current_matrix, f->current_matrix); | |
2961 } | |
2962 | |
2963 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
2964 } | |
2965 } | |
2966 | |
2967 | |
2968 /* Check that window rows are slices of frame rows. WINDOW_MATRIX is | |
2969 a window and FRAME_MATRIX is the corresponding frame matrix. For | |
2970 each row in WINDOW_MATRIX check that it's a slice of the | |
2971 corresponding frame row. If it isn't, abort. */ | |
2972 | |
2973 static void | |
2974 check_matrix_pointers (window_matrix, frame_matrix) | |
2975 struct glyph_matrix *window_matrix, *frame_matrix; | |
2976 { | |
2977 /* Row number in WINDOW_MATRIX. */ | |
2978 int i = 0; | |
2979 | |
2980 /* Row number corresponding to I in FRAME_MATRIX. */ | |
2981 int j = window_matrix->matrix_y; | |
2982 | |
2983 /* For all rows check that the row in the window matrix is a | |
2984 slice of the row in the frame matrix. If it isn't we didn't | |
2985 mirror an operation on the frame matrix correctly. */ | |
2986 while (i < window_matrix->nrows) | |
2987 { | |
2988 if (!glyph_row_slice_p (window_matrix->rows + i, | |
2989 frame_matrix->rows + j)) | |
2990 abort (); | |
2991 ++i, ++j; | |
2992 } | |
2993 } | |
2994 | |
2995 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG != 0 */ | |
2996 | |
2997 | |
2998 | |
2999 /********************************************************************** | |
3000 VPOS and HPOS translations | |
3001 **********************************************************************/ | |
3002 | |
3003 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3004 | |
3005 /* Translate vertical position VPOS which is relative to window W to a | |
3006 vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
3007 | |
3008 static int | |
3009 window_to_frame_vpos (w, vpos) | |
3010 struct window *w; | |
3011 int vpos; | |
3012 { | |
3013 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
3014 | |
3015 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3016 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= w->desired_matrix->nrows); | |
3017 vpos += XFASTINT (w->top); | |
3018 xassert (vpos >= 0 && vpos <= FRAME_HEIGHT (f)); | |
3019 return vpos; | |
3020 } | |
3021 | |
3022 | |
3023 /* Translate horizontal position HPOS which is relative to window W to | |
3024 a vertical position relative to W's frame. */ | |
3025 | |
3026 static int | |
3027 window_to_frame_hpos (w, hpos) | |
3028 struct window *w; | |
3029 int hpos; | |
3030 { | |
3031 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
3032 | |
3033 xassert (!FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3034 hpos += XFASTINT (w->left); | |
3035 return hpos; | |
314 | 3036 } |
25012 | 3037 |
3038 #endif /* GLYPH_DEBUG */ | |
3039 | |
3040 | |
314 | 3041 |
25012 | 3042 /********************************************************************** |
3043 Redrawing Frames | |
3044 **********************************************************************/ | |
3045 | |
3046 DEFUN ("redraw-frame", Fredraw_frame, Sredraw_frame, 1, 1, 0, | |
3047 "Clear frame FRAME and output again what is supposed to appear on it.") | |
3048 (frame) | |
3049 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3050 { | |
3051 struct frame *f; | |
3052 | |
3053 CHECK_LIVE_FRAME (frame, 0); | |
3054 f = XFRAME (frame); | |
3055 | |
3056 /* Ignore redraw requests, if frame has no glyphs yet. | |
3057 (Implementation note: It still has to be checked why we are | |
3058 called so early here). */ | |
3059 if (!glyphs_initialized_initially_p) | |
3060 return Qnil; | |
3061 | |
3062 update_begin (f); | |
3063 if (FRAME_MSDOS_P (f)) | |
3064 set_terminal_modes (); | |
3065 clear_frame (); | |
3066 clear_current_matrices (f); | |
3067 update_end (f); | |
3068 fflush (stdout); | |
3069 windows_or_buffers_changed++; | |
3070 /* Mark all windows as inaccurate, so that every window will have | |
3071 its redisplay done. */ | |
3072 mark_window_display_accurate (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), 0); | |
3073 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f)), 1); | |
3074 f->garbaged = 0; | |
3075 return Qnil; | |
3076 } | |
3077 | |
3078 | |
3079 /* Redraw frame F. This is nothing more than a call to the Lisp | |
3080 function redraw-frame. */ | |
3081 | |
3082 void | |
3083 redraw_frame (f) | |
3084 struct frame *f; | |
3085 { | |
3086 Lisp_Object frame; | |
3087 XSETFRAME (frame, f); | |
3088 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3089 } | |
3090 | |
3091 | |
3092 DEFUN ("redraw-display", Fredraw_display, Sredraw_display, 0, 0, "", | |
3093 "Clear and redisplay all visible frames.") | |
3094 () | |
3095 { | |
3096 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3097 | |
3098 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3099 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3100 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3101 | |
3102 return Qnil; | |
3103 } | |
3104 | |
3105 | |
3106 /* This is used when frame_garbaged is set. Call Fredraw_frame on all | |
3107 visible frames marked as garbaged. */ | |
3108 | |
3109 void | |
3110 redraw_garbaged_frames () | |
3111 { | |
3112 Lisp_Object tail, frame; | |
3113 | |
3114 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
3115 if (FRAME_VISIBLE_P (XFRAME (frame)) | |
3116 && FRAME_GARBAGED_P (XFRAME (frame))) | |
3117 Fredraw_frame (frame); | |
3118 } | |
3119 | |
3120 | |
3121 | |
3122 /*********************************************************************** | |
3123 Direct Operations | |
3124 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3125 | |
3126 /* Try to update display and current glyph matrix directly. | |
3127 | |
3128 This function is called after a character G has been inserted into | |
3129 current_buffer. It tries to update the current glyph matrix and | |
3130 perform appropriate screen output to reflect the insertion. If it | |
3131 succeeds, the global flag redisplay_performed_directly_p will be | |
3132 set to 1, and thereby prevent the more costly general redisplay | |
3133 from running (see redisplay_internal). | |
3134 | |
3135 This function is not called for `hairy' character insertions. | |
3136 In particular, it is not called when after or before change | |
3137 functions exist, like they are used by font-lock. See keyboard.c | |
3138 for details where this function is called. */ | |
314 | 3139 |
3140 int | |
3141 direct_output_for_insert (g) | |
3142 int g; | |
3143 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3144 register struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3145 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3146 struct it it, it2; | |
3147 struct glyph_row *glyph_row; | |
3148 struct glyph *glyphs, *glyph, *end; | |
3149 int n; | |
3150 /* Non-null means that Redisplay of W is based on window matrices. */ | |
3151 int window_redisplay_p = FRAME_WINDOW_P (f); | |
3152 /* Non-null means we are in overwrite mode. */ | |
3153 int overwrite_p = !NILP (current_buffer->overwrite_mode); | |
3154 int added_width; | |
3155 struct text_pos pos; | |
3156 int delta, delta_bytes; | |
3157 | |
3158 /* Not done directly. */ | |
3159 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 0; | |
3160 | |
3161 /* Quickly give up for some common cases. */ | |
3162 if (cursor_in_echo_area | |
3163 /* Give up if fonts have changed. */ | |
3164 || fonts_changed_p | |
3165 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ | |
3166 || face_change_count | |
3167 /* Give up if cursor position not really known. */ | |
314 | 3168 || !display_completed |
25012 | 3169 /* Give up if buffer appears in two places. */ |
314 | 3170 || buffer_shared > 1 |
25012 | 3171 /* Give up if w is mini-buffer and a message is being displayed there */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3172 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0])) |
25012 | 3173 /* Give up for hscrolled mini-buffer because display of the prompt |
3174 is handled specially there (see display_line). */ | |
3175 || (MINI_WINDOW_P (w) && XFASTINT (w->hscroll)) | |
3176 /* Give up if overwriting in the middle of a line. */ | |
3177 || (overwrite_p | |
3178 && PT != ZV | |
3179 && FETCH_BYTE (PT) != '\n') | |
3180 /* Give up for tabs and line ends. */ | |
3181 || g == '\t' | |
3182 || g == '\n' | |
3183 || g == '\r' | |
3184 /* Give up if unable to display the cursor in the window. */ | |
3185 || w->cursor.vpos < 0 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3186 || (glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos), |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3187 /* Can't do it in a continued line because continuation |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3188 lines would change. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3189 (glyph_row->continued_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3190 /* Can't use this method if the line overlaps others or is |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3191 overlapped by others because these other lines would |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3192 have to be redisplayed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3193 || glyph_row->overlapping_p |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3194 || glyph_row->overlapped_p)) |
25012 | 3195 /* Can't do it for partial width windows on terminal frames |
3196 because we can't clear to eol in such a window. */ | |
3197 || (!window_redisplay_p && !WINDOW_FULL_WIDTH_P (w))) | |
3198 return 0; | |
3199 | |
3200 /* Set up a display iterator structure for W. Glyphs will be | |
3201 produced in scratch_glyph_row. Current position is W's cursor | |
3202 position. */ | |
3203 clear_glyph_row (&scratch_glyph_row); | |
3204 SET_TEXT_POS (pos, PT, PT_BYTE); | |
28361
eccb57c44da5
(direct_output_for_insert): Use DEC_TEXT_POS
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
27968
diff
changeset
|
3205 DEC_TEXT_POS (pos, !NILP (current_buffer->enable_multibyte_characters)); |
25012 | 3206 init_iterator (&it, w, CHARPOS (pos), BYTEPOS (pos), &scratch_glyph_row, |
3207 DEFAULT_FACE_ID); | |
3208 | |
3209 glyph_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3210 if (glyph_row->mouse_face_p) |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3211 return 0; |
25012 | 3212 |
3213 /* Give up if highlighting trailing whitespace and we have trailing | |
3214 whitespace in glyph_row. We would have to remove the trailing | |
3215 whitespace face in that case. */ | |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3216 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace) |
25012 | 3217 && glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
3218 { | |
3219 struct glyph *last; | |
3220 | |
3221 last = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; | |
3222 if (last->type == STRETCH_GLYPH | |
3223 || (last->type == CHAR_GLYPH | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
3224 && last->u.ch == ' ')) |
25012 | 3225 return 0; |
3226 } | |
3227 | |
3228 /* Give up if there are overlay strings at pos. This would fail | |
3229 if the overlay string has newlines in it. */ | |
3230 if (STRINGP (it.string)) | |
3231 return 0; | |
3232 | |
3233 it.hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
3234 it.vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
3235 it.current_x = w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x; | |
3236 it.current_y = w->cursor.y; | |
3237 it.end_charpos = PT; | |
3238 it.stop_charpos = min (PT, it.stop_charpos); | |
3239 | |
3240 /* More than one display element may be returned for PT - 1 if | |
3241 (i) it's a control character which is translated into `\003' or | |
3242 `^C', or (ii) it has a display table entry, or (iii) it's a | |
3243 combination of both. */ | |
3244 delta = delta_bytes = 0; | |
3245 while (get_next_display_element (&it)) | |
3246 { | |
3247 PRODUCE_GLYPHS (&it); | |
3248 | |
3249 /* Give up if glyph doesn't fit completely on the line. */ | |
3250 if (it.current_x >= it.last_visible_x) | |
3251 return 0; | |
3252 | |
3253 /* Give up if new glyph has different ascent or descent than | |
3254 the original row, or if it is not a character glyph. */ | |
3255 if (glyph_row->ascent != it.ascent | |
3256 || glyph_row->height != it.ascent + it.descent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3257 || glyph_row->phys_ascent != it.phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3258 || glyph_row->phys_height != it.phys_ascent + it.phys_descent |
25012 | 3259 || it.what != IT_CHARACTER) |
3260 return 0; | |
3261 | |
3262 delta += 1; | |
3263 delta_bytes += it.len; | |
3264 set_iterator_to_next (&it); | |
3265 } | |
3266 | |
3267 /* Give up if we hit the right edge of the window. We would have | |
3268 to insert truncation or continuation glyphs. */ | |
3269 added_width = it.current_x - (w->cursor.x + it.first_visible_x); | |
3270 if (glyph_row->pixel_width + added_width >= it.last_visible_x) | |
314 | 3271 return 0; |
3272 | |
25012 | 3273 /* Give up if there is a \t following in the line. */ |
3274 it2 = it; | |
3275 it2.end_charpos = ZV; | |
3276 it2.stop_charpos = min (it2.stop_charpos, ZV); | |
3277 while (get_next_display_element (&it2) | |
3278 && !ITERATOR_AT_END_OF_LINE_P (&it2)) | |
3279 { | |
3280 if (it2.c == '\t') | |
3281 return 0; | |
3282 set_iterator_to_next (&it2); | |
3283 } | |
3284 | |
3285 /* Number of new glyphs produced. */ | |
3286 n = it.glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3287 | |
3288 /* Start and end of glyphs in original row. */ | |
3289 glyphs = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA] + w->cursor.hpos; | |
3290 end = glyph_row->glyphs[1 + TEXT_AREA]; | |
3291 | |
3292 /* Make room for new glyphs, then insert them. */ | |
3293 xassert (end - glyphs - n >= 0); | |
25781
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3294 safe_bcopy ((char *) glyphs, (char *) (glyphs + n), |
e5579bc77d9e
(direct_output_for_insert): Cast arguments to
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25735
diff
changeset
|
3295 (end - glyphs - n) * sizeof (*end)); |
25012 | 3296 bcopy (it.glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], glyphs, n * sizeof *glyphs); |
3297 glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = min (glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA] + n, | |
3298 end - glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3299 | |
3300 /* Compute new line width. */ | |
3301 glyph = glyph_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3302 end = glyph + glyph_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3303 glyph_row->pixel_width = glyph_row->x; | |
3304 while (glyph < end) | |
3305 { | |
3306 glyph_row->pixel_width += glyph->pixel_width; | |
3307 ++glyph; | |
3308 } | |
3309 | |
3310 /* Increment buffer positions for glyphs following the newly | |
3311 inserted ones. */ | |
3312 for (glyph = glyphs + n; glyph < end; ++glyph) | |
26546
0f43cc91d6a5
(direct_output_for_insert): Increment glyph positions
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26499
diff
changeset
|
3313 if (glyph->charpos > 0 && BUFFERP (glyph->object)) |
25012 | 3314 glyph->charpos += delta; |
3315 | |
3316 if (MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) > 0) | |
3317 { | |
3318 MATRIX_ROW_END_CHARPOS (glyph_row) += delta; | |
3319 MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (glyph_row) += delta_bytes; | |
3320 } | |
3321 | |
3322 /* Adjust positions in lines following the one we are in. */ | |
28708
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3323 increment_matrix_positions (w->current_matrix, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3324 w->cursor.vpos + 1, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3325 w->current_matrix->nrows, |
4e2497e6757e
(increment_matrix_positions): Renamed from
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28682
diff
changeset
|
3326 delta, delta_bytes); |
25012 | 3327 |
3328 glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
3329 |= it.glyph_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p; | |
3330 | |
26591
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3331 glyph_row->displays_text_p = 1; |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3332 w->window_end_vpos = make_number (max (w->cursor.vpos, |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3333 XFASTINT (w->window_end_vpos))); |
f7c7ef351f04
(direct_output_for_insert): Set glyph row's
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26546
diff
changeset
|
3334 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3335 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
25012 | 3336 highlight_trailing_whitespace (it.f, glyph_row); |
3337 | |
3338 /* Write glyphs. If at end of row, we can simply call write_glyphs. | |
3339 In the middle, we have to insert glyphs. Note that this is now | |
3340 implemented for X frames. The implementation uses updated_window | |
3341 and updated_row. */ | |
3342 updated_row = glyph_row; | |
3343 update_begin (f); | |
3344 if (rif) | |
3345 { | |
3346 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3347 | |
3348 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3349 rif->write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3350 else | |
3351 rif->insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3352 } | |
3353 else | |
3354 { | |
3355 if (glyphs == end - n) | |
3356 write_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3357 else | |
3358 insert_glyphs (glyphs, n); | |
3359 } | |
3360 | |
3361 w->cursor.hpos += n; | |
3362 w->cursor.x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x; | |
3363 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3364 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3365 | |
3366 /* How to set the cursor differs depending on whether we are | |
3367 using a frame matrix or a window matrix. Note that when | |
3368 a frame matrix is used, cursor_to expects frame coordinates, | |
3369 and the X and Y parameters are not used. */ | |
3370 if (window_redisplay_p) | |
3371 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3372 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3373 else | |
3374 { | |
3375 int x, y; | |
3376 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3377 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3378 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3379 : 0)); | |
3380 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3381 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3382 } | |
3383 | |
3384 if (rif) | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3385 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1, 0); |
25012 | 3386 update_end (f); |
3387 updated_row = NULL; | |
3388 fflush (stdout); | |
3389 | |
3390 TRACE ((stderr, "direct output for insert\n")); | |
3391 | |
25372
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3392 UNCHANGED_MODIFIED = MODIFF; |
acf281b41a38
(direct_output_for_insert): Set beg_unchanged
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25345
diff
changeset
|
3393 BEG_UNCHANGED = GPT - BEG; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3394 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3395 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
3396 XSETFASTINT (w->last_modified, MODIFF); |
16195
e15e4bdcb8cc
(direct_output_for_insert): Set last_overlay_modified field in window.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16051
diff
changeset
|
3397 XSETFASTINT (w->last_overlay_modified, OVERLAY_MODIFF); |
314 | 3398 |
25012 | 3399 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3400 return 1; |
3401 } | |
3402 | |
25012 | 3403 |
3404 /* Perform a direct display update for moving PT by N positions | |
3405 left or right. N < 0 means a movement backwards. This function | |
3406 is currently only called for N == 1 or N == -1. */ | |
3407 | |
314 | 3408 int |
3409 direct_output_forward_char (n) | |
3410 int n; | |
3411 { | |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
3412 struct frame *f = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
25012 | 3413 struct window *w = XWINDOW (selected_window); |
3414 struct glyph_row *row; | |
3415 | |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3416 /* Give up if point moved out of or into a composition. */ |
28507
b6f06a755c7d
make_number/XINT/XUINT conversions; EQ/== fixes; ==Qnil -> NILP
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
28361
diff
changeset
|
3417 if (check_point_in_composition (current_buffer, XINT (w->last_point), |
26851
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3418 current_buffer, PT)) |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3419 return 0; |
2513566d55fd
(direct_output_forward_char): Check point moving into
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26729
diff
changeset
|
3420 |
25012 | 3421 /* Give up if face attributes have been changed. */ |
3422 if (face_change_count) | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
3423 return 0; |
25012 | 3424 |
3425 /* Give up if current matrix is not up to date or we are | |
3426 displaying a message. */ | |
3427 if (!display_completed || cursor_in_echo_area) | |
3428 return 0; | |
3429 | |
3430 /* Give up if the buffer's direction is reversed. */ | |
3431 if (!NILP (XBUFFER (w->buffer)->direction_reversed)) | |
314 | 3432 return 0; |
11096
cac0367b1794
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use direct output at an overlay boundary.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
10770
diff
changeset
|
3433 |
2794
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3434 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting a region. */ |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3435 if (!NILP (Vtransient_mark_mode) && !NILP (current_buffer->mark_active)) |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3436 return 0; |
9163e4e4752c
(direct_output_forward_char): Just give up
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
2778
diff
changeset
|
3437 |
25304
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3438 /* Can't use direct output if highlighting trailing whitespace. */ |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3439 if (!NILP (Vshow_trailing_whitespace)) |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3440 return 0; |
4b75c26bd356
(direct_output_for_insert): Use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25241
diff
changeset
|
3441 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3442 /* Give up if we are showing a message or just cleared the message |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3443 because we might need to resize the echo area window. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3444 if (!NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) || !NILP (echo_area_buffer[1])) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3445 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3446 |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3447 /* Give up if currently displaying a message instead of the |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3448 minibuffer contents. */ |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3449 if (XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3450 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window)) |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3451 return 0; |
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
3452 |
25735
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3453 /* Give up if we don't know where the cursor is. */ |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3454 if (w->cursor.vpos < 0) |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3455 return 0; |
fcb92c26acf2
(direct_output_forward_char): Don't use this method
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25725
diff
changeset
|
3456 |
25012 | 3457 row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, w->cursor.vpos); |
3458 | |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
3459 /* Give up if PT is outside of the last known cursor row. */ |
25012 | 3460 if (PT <= MATRIX_ROW_START_BYTEPOS (row) |
3461 || PT >= MATRIX_ROW_END_BYTEPOS (row)) | |
6069
07045ca8ff19
(direct_output_forward_char): Use Fget_char_property to test for invisibility.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
6068
diff
changeset
|
3462 return 0; |
4384
98605d0ea3cf
(direct_output_for_insert): Fail if character
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
4290
diff
changeset
|
3463 |
25012 | 3464 set_cursor_from_row (w, row, w->current_matrix, 0, 0, 0, 0); |
31271
4f0c5eecc5a6
(build_frame_matrix_from_leaf_window): If a row of a
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31093
diff
changeset
|
3465 |
25012 | 3466 w->last_cursor = w->cursor; |
16039
855c8d8ba0f0
Change all references from point to PT.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15896
diff
changeset
|
3467 XSETFASTINT (w->last_point, PT); |
25012 | 3468 |
3469 xassert (w->cursor.hpos >= 0 | |
3470 && w->cursor.hpos < w->desired_matrix->matrix_w); | |
3471 | |
3472 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3473 rif->cursor_to (w->cursor.vpos, w->cursor.hpos, | |
3474 w->cursor.y, w->cursor.x); | |
3475 else | |
3476 { | |
3477 int x, y; | |
3478 x = (WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos) | |
3479 + (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width) | |
3480 ? XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width) | |
3481 : 0)); | |
3482 y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
3483 cursor_to (y, x); | |
3484 } | |
3485 | |
314 | 3486 fflush (stdout); |
25012 | 3487 redisplay_performed_directly_p = 1; |
314 | 3488 return 1; |
3489 } | |
25012 | 3490 |
3491 | |
314 | 3492 |
25012 | 3493 /*********************************************************************** |
3494 Frame Update | |
3495 ***********************************************************************/ | |
3496 | |
3497 /* Update frame F based on the data in desired matrices. | |
3498 | |
3499 If FORCE_P is non-zero, don't let redisplay be stopped by detecting | |
3500 pending input. If INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P is non-zero, don't try | |
3501 scrolling. | |
3502 | |
3503 Value is non-zero if redisplay was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
314 | 3504 |
3505 int | |
25012 | 3506 update_frame (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p) |
3507 struct frame *f; | |
3508 int force_p; | |
3509 int inhibit_hairy_id_p; | |
3510 { | |
3511 /* 1 means display has been paused because of pending input. */ | |
3512 int paused_p; | |
3513 struct window *root_window = XWINDOW (f->root_window); | |
3514 | |
3515 if (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) | |
3516 { | |
3517 /* We are working on window matrix basis. All windows whose | |
3518 flag must_be_updated_p is set have to be updated. */ | |
3519 | |
3520 /* Record that we are not working on frame matrices. */ | |
3521 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3522 | |
3523 /* Update all windows in the window tree of F, maybe stopping | |
3524 when pending input is detected. */ | |
3525 update_begin (f); | |
3526 | |
3527 /* Update the menu bar on X frames that don't have toolkit | |
3528 support. */ | |
3529 if (WINDOWP (f->menu_bar_window)) | |
3530 update_window (XWINDOW (f->menu_bar_window), 1); | |
3531 | |
3532 /* Update the tool-bar window, if present. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3533 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
25012 | 3534 { |
3535 Lisp_Object tem; | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3536 struct window *w = XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window); |
25012 | 3537 |
3538 /* Update tool-bar window. */ | |
3539 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3540 { | |
3541 update_window (w, 1); | |
3542 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3543 | |
3544 /* Swap tool-bar strings. We swap because we want to | |
3545 reuse strings. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3546 tem = f->current_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3547 f->current_tool_bar_string = f->desired_tool_bar_string; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3548 f->desired_tool_bar_string = tem; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3549 f->n_current_tool_bar_items = f->n_desired_tool_bar_items; |
25012 | 3550 |
3551 /* Swap tool-bar items. We swap because we want to | |
3552 reuse vectors. */ | |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3553 tem = f->current_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3554 f->current_tool_bar_items = f->desired_tool_bar_items; |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
3555 f->desired_tool_bar_items = tem; |
25012 | 3556 } |
3557 } | |
3558 | |
3559 | |
3560 /* Update windows. */ | |
3561 paused_p = update_window_tree (root_window, force_p); | |
3562 update_end (f); | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3563 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3564 #if 0 /* This flush is a performance bottleneck under X, |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3565 and it doesn't seem to be necessary anyway. */ |
25012 | 3566 rif->flush_display (f); |
3567 #endif | |
3568 } | |
3569 else | |
3570 { | |
3571 /* We are working on frame matrix basis. Set the frame on whose | |
3572 frame matrix we operate. */ | |
3573 set_frame_matrix_frame (f); | |
3574 | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3575 /* Build F's desired matrix from window matrices. */ |
25012 | 3576 build_frame_matrix (f); |
3577 | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3578 /* Update the display */ |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3579 update_begin (f); |
25012 | 3580 paused_p = update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_hairy_id_p); |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3581 update_end (f); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3582 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3583 if (termscript) |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3584 fflush (termscript); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3585 fflush (stdout); |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3586 |
25012 | 3587 /* Check window matrices for lost pointers. */ |
3588 IF_DEBUG (check_window_matrix_pointers (root_window)); | |
3589 } | |
3590 | |
3591 /* Reset flags indicating that a window should be updated. */ | |
3592 set_window_update_flags (root_window, 0); | |
31295
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3593 |
d4f918f0b184
(update_frame): Only set display_completed here; use
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
31271
diff
changeset
|
3594 display_completed = !paused_p; |
25012 | 3595 return paused_p; |
3596 } | |
3597 | |
3598 | |
3599 | |
3600 /************************************************************************ | |
3601 Window-based updates | |
3602 ************************************************************************/ | |
3603 | |
3604 /* Perform updates in window tree rooted at W. FORCE_P non-zero means | |
3605 don't stop updating when input is pending. */ | |
3606 | |
3607 static int | |
3608 update_window_tree (w, force_p) | |
3609 struct window *w; | |
3610 int force_p; | |
3611 { | |
3612 int paused_p = 0; | |
3613 | |
3614 while (w && !paused_p) | |
3615 { | |
3616 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) | |
3617 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->hchild), force_p); | |
3618 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) | |
3619 paused_p |= update_window_tree (XWINDOW (w->vchild), force_p); | |
3620 else if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3621 paused_p |= update_window (w, force_p); | |
3622 | |
3623 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); | |
3624 } | |
3625 | |
3626 return paused_p; | |
3627 } | |
3628 | |
3629 | |
3630 /* Update window W if its flag must_be_updated_p is non-zero. If | |
3631 FORCE_P is non-zero, don't stop updating if input is pending. */ | |
3632 | |
3633 void | |
3634 update_single_window (w, force_p) | |
3635 struct window *w; | |
3636 int force_p; | |
3637 { | |
3638 if (w->must_be_updated_p) | |
3639 { | |
3640 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); | |
3641 | |
3642 /* Record that this is not a frame-based redisplay. */ | |
3643 set_frame_matrix_frame (NULL); | |
3644 | |
3645 /* Update W. */ | |
3646 update_begin (f); | |
3647 update_window (w, force_p); | |
3648 update_end (f); | |
3649 | |
3650 /* Reset flag in W. */ | |
3651 w->must_be_updated_p = 0; | |
3652 } | |
3653 } | |
3654 | |
3655 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3656 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that are |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3657 overlapped by other rows. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3658 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3659 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3660 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3661 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3662 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3663 { |
30165
d7ec5b3caccc
(redraw_overlapped_rows): Add missing local.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30161
diff
changeset
|
3664 int i; |
d7ec5b3caccc
(redraw_overlapped_rows): Add missing local.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30161
diff
changeset
|
3665 |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3666 /* If rows overlapping others have been changed, the rows being |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3667 overlapped have to be redrawn. This won't draw lines that have |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3668 already been drawn in update_window_line because overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3669 desired rows is 0, so after row assignment overlapped_p in |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3670 current rows is 0. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3671 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3672 { |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3673 struct glyph_row *row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3674 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3675 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3676 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3677 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3678 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3679 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3680 if (row->overlapped_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3681 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3682 enum glyph_row_area area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3683 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3684 for (area = LEFT_MARGIN_AREA; area < LAST_AREA; ++area) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3685 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3686 updated_row = row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3687 updated_area = area; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3688 rif->cursor_to (i, 0, row->y, area == TEXT_AREA ? row->x : 0); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3689 if (row->used[area]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3690 rif->write_glyphs (row->glyphs[area], row->used[area]); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3691 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3692 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3693 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3694 row->overlapped_p = 0; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3695 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3696 |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3697 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3698 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3699 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3700 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3701 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3702 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3703 /* Redraw lines from the current matrix of window W that overlap |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3704 others. YB is bottom-most y-position in W. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3705 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3706 static void |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3707 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3708 struct window *w; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3709 int yb; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3710 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3711 int i, bottom_y; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3712 struct glyph_row *row; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3713 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3714 for (i = 0; i < w->current_matrix->nrows; ++i) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3715 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3716 row = w->current_matrix->rows + i; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3717 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3718 if (!row->enabled_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3719 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3720 else if (row->mode_line_p) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3721 continue; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3722 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3723 bottom_y = MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3724 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3725 if (row->overlapping_p && i > 0 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3726 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3727 if (row->used[LEFT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3728 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3729 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3730 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3731 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, TEXT_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3732 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3733 if (row->used[RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA]) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3734 rif->fix_overlapping_area (w, row, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3735 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3736 /* Record in neighbor rows that ROW overwrites part of their |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3737 display. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3738 if (row->phys_ascent > row->ascent && i > 0) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3739 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i - 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3740 if ((row->phys_height - row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3741 > row->height - row->ascent) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3742 && bottom_y < yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3743 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i + 1)->overlapped_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3744 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3745 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3746 if (bottom_y >= yb) |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3747 break; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3748 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3749 } |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3750 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3751 |
25012 | 3752 /* Update display of window W. FORCE_P non-zero means that we should |
3753 not stop when detecting pending input. */ | |
3754 | |
3755 static int | |
3756 update_window (w, force_p) | |
3757 struct window *w; | |
3758 int force_p; | |
3759 { | |
3760 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
3761 int paused_p; | |
3762 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
3763 extern int input_pending; | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3764 #if GLYPH_DEBUG |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3765 struct frame *f = XFRAME (WINDOW_FRAME (w)); |
25012 | 3766 extern struct frame *updating_frame; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
3767 #endif |
25012 | 3768 |
3769 /* Check that W's frame doesn't have glyph matrices. */ | |
3770 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
3771 xassert (updating_frame != NULL); | |
3772 | |
3773 /* Check pending input the first time so that we can quickly return. */ | |
3774 if (redisplay_dont_pause) | |
3775 force_p = 1; | |
3776 else | |
3777 detect_input_pending (); | |
3778 | |
3779 /* If forced to complete the update, or if no input is pending, do | |
3780 the update. */ | |
3781 if (force_p || !input_pending) | |
3782 { | |
3783 struct glyph_row *row, *end; | |
3784 struct glyph_row *mode_line_row; | |
25546 | 3785 struct glyph_row *header_line_row = NULL; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3786 int yb, changed_p = 0, mouse_face_overwritten_p = 0; |
25012 | 3787 |
3788 rif->update_window_begin_hook (w); | |
3789 yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
3790 | |
3791 /* If window has a top line, update it before everything else. | |
3792 Adjust y-positions of other rows by the top line height. */ | |
3793 row = desired_matrix->rows; | |
3794 end = row + desired_matrix->nrows - 1; | |
3795 if (row->mode_line_p) | |
25546 | 3796 header_line_row = row++; |
25012 | 3797 |
3798 /* Update the mode line, if necessary. */ | |
3799 mode_line_row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (desired_matrix); | |
3800 if (mode_line_row->mode_line_p && mode_line_row->enabled_p) | |
3801 { | |
3802 mode_line_row->y = yb; | |
3803 update_window_line (w, MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (mode_line_row, | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3804 desired_matrix), |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3805 &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3806 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3807 } |
3808 | |
3809 /* Find first enabled row. Optimizations in redisplay_internal | |
3810 may lead to an update with only one row enabled. There may | |
3811 be also completely empty matrices. */ | |
3812 while (row < end && !row->enabled_p) | |
3813 ++row; | |
3814 | |
3815 /* Try reusing part of the display by inserting/deleting lines. */ | |
3816 if (row < end && !desired_matrix->no_scrolling_p) | |
3817 { | |
25546 | 3818 int rc = scrolling_window (w, header_line_row != NULL); |
25012 | 3819 if (rc < 0) |
3820 { | |
3821 /* All rows were found to be equal. */ | |
3822 paused_p = 0; | |
3823 goto set_cursor; | |
3824 } | |
3825 else if (rc > 0) | |
3826 force_p = 1; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3827 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3828 } |
3829 | |
3830 /* Update the top mode line after scrolling because a new top | |
3831 line would otherwise overwrite lines at the top of the window | |
3832 that can be scrolled. */ | |
25546 | 3833 if (header_line_row && header_line_row->enabled_p) |
25012 | 3834 { |
25546 | 3835 header_line_row->y = 0; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3836 update_window_line (w, 0, &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3837 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3838 } |
3839 | |
3840 /* Update the rest of the lines. */ | |
3841 for (; row < end && (force_p || !input_pending); ++row) | |
3842 if (row->enabled_p | |
3843 /* A row can be completely invisible in case a desired | |
3844 matrix was built with a vscroll and then | |
3845 make_cursor_line_fully_visible shifts the matrix. */ | |
3846 && row->visible_height > 0) | |
3847 { | |
3848 int vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (row, desired_matrix); | |
3849 int i; | |
3850 | |
3851 /* We'll Have to play a little bit with when to | |
3852 detect_input_pending. If it's done too often, | |
3853 scrolling large windows with repeated scroll-up | |
3854 commands will too quickly pause redisplay. */ | |
3855 if (!force_p && vpos % preempt_count == 0) | |
3856 detect_input_pending (); | |
3857 | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3858 changed_p |= update_window_line (w, vpos, |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3859 &mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25012 | 3860 |
3861 /* Mark all rows below the last visible one in the current | |
3862 matrix as invalid. This is necessary because of | |
3863 variable line heights. Consider the case of three | |
3864 successive redisplays, where the first displays 5 | |
3865 lines, the second 3 lines, and the third 5 lines again. | |
3866 If the second redisplay wouldn't mark rows in the | |
3867 current matrix invalid, the third redisplay might be | |
3868 tempted to optimize redisplay based on lines displayed | |
3869 in the first redisplay. */ | |
3870 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) | |
3871 for (i = vpos + 1; i < w->current_matrix->nrows - 1; ++i) | |
3872 MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
3873 } | |
3874 | |
3875 /* Was display preempted? */ | |
3876 paused_p = row < end; | |
3877 | |
3878 set_cursor: | |
3879 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3880 /* Fix the appearance of overlapping(overlapped rows. */ |
25012 | 3881 if (!paused_p && !w->pseudo_window_p) |
3882 { | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3883 if (changed_p && rif->fix_overlapping_area) |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3884 { |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3885 redraw_overlapped_rows (w, yb); |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3886 redraw_overlapping_rows (w, yb); |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3887 } |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3888 |
25012 | 3889 /* Make cursor visible at cursor position of W. */ |
3890 set_window_cursor_after_update (w); | |
3891 | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3892 #if 0 /* Check that current matrix invariants are satisfied. This is |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3893 for debugging only. See the comment of check_matrix_invariants. */ |
25012 | 3894 IF_DEBUG (check_matrix_invariants (w)); |
3895 #endif | |
3896 } | |
3897 | |
3898 #if GLYPH_DEBUG | |
3899 /* Remember the redisplay method used to display the matrix. */ | |
3900 strcpy (w->current_matrix->method, w->desired_matrix->method); | |
3901 #endif | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3902 |
25012 | 3903 /* End of update of window W. */ |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
3904 rif->update_window_end_hook (w, 1, mouse_face_overwritten_p); |
25012 | 3905 } |
3906 else | |
3907 paused_p = 1; | |
3908 | |
3909 clear_glyph_matrix (desired_matrix); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3910 |
25012 | 3911 return paused_p; |
3912 } | |
3913 | |
3914 | |
3915 /* Update the display of area AREA in window W, row number VPOS. | |
3916 AREA can be either LEFT_MARGIN_AREA or RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA. */ | |
3917 | |
3918 static void | |
3919 update_marginal_area (w, area, vpos) | |
3920 struct window *w; | |
3921 int area, vpos; | |
3922 { | |
3923 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
3924 | |
3925 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3926 will be relative to. */ | |
3927 updated_area = area; | |
3928 | |
3929 /* Set cursor to start of glyphs, write them, and clear to the end | |
3930 of the area. I don't think that something more sophisticated is | |
3931 necessary here, since marginal areas will not be the default. */ | |
3932 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, 0); | |
3933 if (desired_row->used[area]) | |
3934 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[area], desired_row->used[area]); | |
3935 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
3936 } | |
3937 | |
3938 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3939 /* Update the display of the text area of row VPOS in window W. |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3940 Value is non-zero if display has changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3941 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3942 static int |
25012 | 3943 update_text_area (w, vpos) |
3944 struct window *w; | |
3945 int vpos; | |
314 | 3946 { |
25012 | 3947 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); |
3948 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3949 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 3950 |
3951 /* Let functions in xterm.c know what area subsequent X positions | |
3952 will be relative to. */ | |
3953 updated_area = TEXT_AREA; | |
3954 | |
3955 /* If rows are at different X or Y, or rows have different height, | |
3956 or the current row is marked invalid, write the entire line. */ | |
3957 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
3958 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
3959 || desired_row->ascent != current_row->ascent | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3960 || desired_row->phys_ascent != current_row->phys_ascent |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3961 || desired_row->phys_height != current_row->phys_height |
25012 | 3962 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3963 || current_row->overlapped_p |
30307
faf4e303bab7
(update_text_area): Write the whole row if it
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30165
diff
changeset
|
3964 || current_row->mouse_face_p |
25012 | 3965 || current_row->x != desired_row->x) |
3966 { | |
3967 rif->cursor_to (vpos, 0, desired_row->y, desired_row->x); | |
3968 | |
3969 if (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
3970 rif->write_glyphs (desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA], | |
3971 desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
3972 | |
3973 /* Clear to end of window. */ | |
3974 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
3975 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 3976 } |
3977 else | |
3978 { | |
3979 int stop, i, x; | |
3980 struct glyph *current_glyph = current_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3981 struct glyph *desired_glyph = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
3982 | |
3983 /* If the desired row extends its face to the text area end, | |
3984 make sure we write at least one glyph, so that the face | |
3985 extension actually takes place. */ | |
3986 int desired_stop_pos = (desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
3987 - (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row) | |
3988 ? 1 : 0)); | |
3989 | |
3990 stop = min (current_row->used[TEXT_AREA], desired_stop_pos); | |
3991 i = 0; | |
3992 x = desired_row->x; | |
3993 | |
3994 while (i < stop) | |
3995 { | |
3996 /* Skip over glyphs that both rows have in common. These | |
3997 don't have to be written. */ | |
3998 while (i < stop | |
3999 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph)) | |
4000 { | |
4001 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4002 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
4003 } | |
4004 | |
4005 /* Consider the case that the current row contains "xxx ppp | |
4006 ggg" in italic Courier font, and the desired row is "xxx | |
4007 ggg". The character `p' has lbearing, `g' has not. The | |
4008 loop above will stop in front of the first `p' in the | |
4009 current row. If we would start writing glyphs there, we | |
4010 wouldn't erase the lbearing of the `p'. The rest of the | |
4011 lbearing problem is then taken care of by x_draw_glyphs. */ | |
4012 if (current_row->contains_overlapping_glyphs_p | |
4013 && i > 0 | |
4014 && i < current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] | |
4015 && current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] != desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4016 { | |
4017 int left, right; | |
4018 rif->get_glyph_overhangs (current_glyph, XFRAME (w->frame), | |
4019 &left, &right); | |
4020 while (left > 0 && i > 0) | |
4021 { | |
4022 --i, --desired_glyph, --current_glyph; | |
4023 x -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4024 left -= desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4025 } | |
4026 } | |
4027 | |
4028 /* Try to avoid writing the entire rest of the desired row | |
4029 by looking for a resync point. This mainly prevents | |
4030 mode line flickering in the case the mode line is in | |
4031 fixed-pitch font, which it usually will be. */ | |
4032 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4033 { | |
4034 int start_x = x, start_hpos = i; | |
4035 struct glyph *start = desired_glyph; | |
4036 int current_x = x; | |
4037 | |
4038 /* Find the next glyph that's equal again. */ | |
4039 while (i < stop | |
4040 && !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (desired_glyph, current_glyph) | |
4041 && x == current_x) | |
4042 { | |
4043 x += desired_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4044 current_x += current_glyph->pixel_width; | |
4045 ++desired_glyph, ++current_glyph, ++i; | |
4046 } | |
4047 | |
4048 if (i == start_hpos || x != current_x) | |
4049 { | |
4050 i = start_hpos; | |
4051 x = start_x; | |
4052 desired_glyph = start; | |
4053 break; | |
4054 } | |
4055 | |
4056 rif->cursor_to (vpos, start_hpos, desired_row->y, start_x); | |
4057 rif->write_glyphs (start, i - start_hpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4058 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4059 } |
4060 } | |
4061 | |
4062 /* Write the rest. */ | |
4063 if (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4064 { | |
4065 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, x); | |
4066 rif->write_glyphs (desired_glyph, desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA] - i); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4067 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4068 } |
4069 | |
4070 /* Maybe clear to end of line. */ | |
4071 if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (desired_row)) | |
4072 { | |
4073 /* If new row extends to the end of the text area, nothing | |
4074 has to be cleared, if and only if we did a write_glyphs | |
4075 above. This is made sure by setting desired_stop_pos | |
4076 appropriately above. */ | |
4077 xassert (i < desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]); | |
4078 } | |
4079 else if (MATRIX_ROW_EXTENDS_FACE_P (current_row)) | |
4080 { | |
4081 /* If old row extends to the end of the text area, clear. */ | |
4082 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4083 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4084 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4085 rif->clear_end_of_line (-1); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4086 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4087 } |
4088 else if (desired_row->pixel_width < current_row->pixel_width) | |
4089 { | |
4090 /* Otherwise clear to the end of the old row. Everything | |
4091 after that position should be clear already. */ | |
4092 int x; | |
4093 | |
4094 if (i >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4095 rif->cursor_to (vpos, i, desired_row->y, | |
4096 desired_row->x + desired_row->pixel_width); | |
4097 | |
4098 /* If cursor is displayed at the end of the line, make sure | |
4099 it's cleared. Nowadays we don't have a phys_cursor_glyph | |
4100 with which to erase the cursor (because this method | |
4101 doesn't work with lbearing/rbearing), so we must do it | |
4102 this way. */ | |
4103 if (vpos == w->phys_cursor.vpos | |
4104 && w->phys_cursor.hpos >= desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]) | |
4105 { | |
4106 w->phys_cursor_on_p = 0; | |
4107 x = -1; | |
4108 } | |
4109 else | |
4110 x = current_row->x + current_row->pixel_width; | |
4111 rif->clear_end_of_line (x); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4112 changed_p = 1; |
25012 | 4113 } |
4114 } | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4115 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4116 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4117 } |
4118 | |
4119 | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4120 /* Update row VPOS in window W. Value is non-zero if display has been |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4121 changed. */ |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4122 |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4123 static int |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4124 update_window_line (w, vpos, mouse_face_overwritten_p) |
25012 | 4125 struct window *w; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4126 int vpos, *mouse_face_overwritten_p; |
25012 | 4127 { |
4128 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4129 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (w->desired_matrix, vpos); | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4130 int changed_p = 0; |
25012 | 4131 |
4132 xassert (desired_row->enabled_p); | |
4133 | |
4134 /* Set the row being updated. This is important to let xterm.c | |
4135 know what line height values are in effect. */ | |
4136 updated_row = desired_row; | |
4137 | |
4138 /* Update display of the left margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4139 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4140 && !NILP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4141 { |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4142 changed_p = 1; |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4143 update_marginal_area (w, LEFT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4144 } |
25012 | 4145 |
4146 /* Update the display of the text area. */ | |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4147 if (update_text_area (w, vpos)) |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4148 { |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4149 changed_p = 1; |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4150 if (current_row->mouse_face_p) |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4151 *mouse_face_overwritten_p = 1; |
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4152 } |
25012 | 4153 |
4154 /* Update display of the right margin area, if there is one. */ | |
4155 if (!desired_row->full_width_p | |
4156 && !NILP (w->right_margin_width)) | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4157 { |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4158 changed_p = 1; |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4159 update_marginal_area (w, RIGHT_MARGIN_AREA, vpos); |
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4160 } |
25012 | 4161 |
4162 /* Draw truncation marks etc. */ | |
4163 if (!current_row->enabled_p | |
4164 || desired_row->y != current_row->y | |
4165 || desired_row->visible_height != current_row->visible_height | |
4166 || desired_row->overlay_arrow_p != current_row->overlay_arrow_p | |
4167 || desired_row->truncated_on_left_p != current_row->truncated_on_left_p | |
4168 || desired_row->truncated_on_right_p != current_row->truncated_on_right_p | |
4169 || desired_row->continued_p != current_row->continued_p | |
4170 || desired_row->mode_line_p != current_row->mode_line_p | |
4171 || (desired_row->indicate_empty_line_p | |
4172 != current_row->indicate_empty_line_p) | |
4173 || (MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (desired_row) | |
4174 != MATRIX_ROW_CONTINUATION_LINE_P (current_row))) | |
4175 rif->after_update_window_line_hook (desired_row); | |
4176 | |
4177 /* Update current_row from desired_row. */ | |
4178 make_current (w->desired_matrix, w->current_matrix, vpos); | |
4179 updated_row = NULL; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4180 return changed_p; |
25012 | 4181 } |
4182 | |
4183 | |
4184 /* Set the cursor after an update of window W. This function may only | |
4185 be called from update_window. */ | |
4186 | |
4187 static void | |
4188 set_window_cursor_after_update (w) | |
4189 struct window *w; | |
4190 { | |
4191 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
4192 int cx, cy, vpos, hpos; | |
4193 | |
4194 /* Not intended for frame matrix updates. */ | |
4195 xassert (FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)); | |
4196 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4197 if (cursor_in_echo_area |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4198 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4199 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4200 show the cursor for the message instead. */ |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4201 && XWINDOW (minibuf_window) == w |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4202 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25012 | 4203 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
4204 the active mini-buffer window. */ | |
4205 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) | |
4206 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) | |
4207 { | |
4208 cx = cy = vpos = hpos = 0; | |
4209 | |
4210 if (cursor_in_echo_area >= 0) | |
4211 { | |
4212 /* If the mini-buffer is several lines high, find the last | |
4213 line that has any text on it. Note: either all lines | |
4214 are enabled or none. Otherwise we wouldn't be able to | |
4215 determine Y. */ | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4216 struct glyph_row *row, *last_row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4217 struct glyph *glyph; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4218 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4219 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4220 last_row = NULL; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4221 for (row = MATRIX_ROW (w->current_matrix, 0); |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4222 row->enabled_p; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4223 ++row) |
25012 | 4224 { |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4225 if (row->used[TEXT_AREA] |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4226 && row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA][0].charpos >= 0) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4227 last_row = row; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4228 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4229 if (MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (row) >= yb) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4230 break; |
25012 | 4231 } |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4232 |
25012 | 4233 if (last_row) |
4234 { | |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4235 struct glyph *start = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4236 struct glyph *last = start + row->used[TEXT_AREA] - 1; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4237 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4238 while (last > start && last->charpos < 0) |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4239 --last; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4240 |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4241 for (glyph = start; glyph < last; ++glyph) |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4242 { |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4243 cx += glyph->pixel_width; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4244 ++hpos; |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4245 } |
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4246 |
25012 | 4247 cy = last_row->y; |
25190
a14edd4a5f4a
(set_window_cursor_after_update): Correct cursor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25186
diff
changeset
|
4248 vpos = MATRIX_ROW_VPOS (last_row, w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 4249 } |
4250 } | |
4251 } | |
4252 else | |
4253 { | |
4254 cx = w->cursor.x; | |
4255 cy = w->cursor.y; | |
4256 hpos = w->cursor.hpos; | |
4257 vpos = w->cursor.vpos; | |
4258 } | |
4259 | |
4260 /* Window cursor can be out of sync for horizontally split windows. */ | |
4261 hpos = max (0, hpos); | |
4262 hpos = min (w->current_matrix->matrix_w - 1, hpos); | |
4263 vpos = max (0, vpos); | |
4264 vpos = min (w->current_matrix->nrows - 1, vpos); | |
4265 rif->cursor_to (vpos, hpos, cy, cx); | |
4266 } | |
4267 | |
4268 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4269 /* Set WINDOW->must_be_updated_p to ON_P for all windows in the window |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4270 tree rooted at W. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4271 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4272 void |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4273 set_window_update_flags (w, on_p) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4274 struct window *w; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4275 int on_p; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4276 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4277 while (w) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4278 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4279 if (!NILP (w->hchild)) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4280 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->hchild), on_p); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4281 else if (!NILP (w->vchild)) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4282 set_window_update_flags (XWINDOW (w->vchild), on_p); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4283 else |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4284 w->must_be_updated_p = on_p; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4285 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4286 w = NILP (w->next) ? 0 : XWINDOW (w->next); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4287 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4288 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4289 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4290 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4291 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4292 /*********************************************************************** |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4293 Window-Based Scrolling |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4294 ***********************************************************************/ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4295 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4296 /* Structure describing rows in scrolling_window. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4297 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4298 struct row_entry |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4299 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4300 /* Number of occurrences of this row in desired and current matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4301 int old_uses, new_uses; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4302 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4303 /* Vpos of row in new matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4304 int new_line_number; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4305 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4306 /* Bucket index of this row_entry in the hash table row_table. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4307 int bucket; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4308 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4309 /* The row described by this entry. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4310 struct glyph_row *row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4311 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4312 /* Hash collision chain. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4313 struct row_entry *next; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4314 }; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4315 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4316 /* A pool to allocate row_entry structures from, and the size of the |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4317 pool. The pool is reallocated in scrolling_window when we find |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4318 that we need a larger one. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4319 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4320 static struct row_entry *row_entry_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4321 static int row_entry_pool_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4322 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4323 /* Index of next free entry in row_entry_pool. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4324 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4325 static int row_entry_idx; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4326 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4327 /* The hash table used during scrolling, and the table's size. This |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4328 table is used to quickly identify equal rows in the desired and |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4329 current matrix. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4330 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4331 static struct row_entry **row_table; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4332 static int row_table_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4333 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4334 /* Vectors of pointers to row_entry structures belonging to the |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4335 current and desired matrix, and the size of the vectors. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4336 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4337 static struct row_entry **old_lines, **new_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4338 static int old_lines_size, new_lines_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4339 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4340 /* A pool to allocate run structures from, and its size. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4341 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4342 static struct run *run_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4343 static int runs_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4344 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4345 /* A vector of runs of lines found during scrolling. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4346 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4347 static struct run **runs; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4348 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4349 static struct row_entry *add_row_entry P_ ((struct window *, |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4350 struct glyph_row *)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4351 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4352 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4353 /* Add glyph row ROW to the scrolling hash table during the scrolling |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4354 of window W. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4355 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4356 static INLINE struct row_entry * |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4357 add_row_entry (w, row) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4358 struct window *w; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4359 struct glyph_row *row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4360 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4361 struct row_entry *entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4362 int i = row->hash % row_table_size; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4363 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4364 entry = row_table[i]; |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4365 while (entry && !row_equal_p (w, entry->row, row, 1)) |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4366 entry = entry->next; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4367 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4368 if (entry == NULL) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4369 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4370 entry = row_entry_pool + row_entry_idx++; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4371 entry->row = row; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4372 entry->old_uses = entry->new_uses = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4373 entry->new_line_number = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4374 entry->bucket = i; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4375 entry->next = row_table[i]; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4376 row_table[i] = entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4377 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4378 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4379 return entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4380 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4381 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4382 |
25012 | 4383 /* Try to reuse part of the current display of W by scrolling lines. |
25546 | 4384 HEADER_LINE_P non-zero means W has a top mode line. |
25012 | 4385 |
4386 The algorithm is taken from Communications of the ACM, Apr78 "A | |
4387 Technique for Isolating Differences Between Files." It should take | |
4388 O(N) time. | |
4389 | |
4390 A short outline of the steps of the algorithm | |
4391 | |
4392 1. Skip lines equal at the start and end of both matrices. | |
4393 | |
4394 2. Enter rows in the current and desired matrix into a symbol | |
4395 table, counting how often they appear in both matrices. | |
4396 | |
4397 3. Rows that appear exactly once in both matrices serve as anchors, | |
4398 i.e. we assume that such lines are likely to have been moved. | |
4399 | |
4400 4. Starting from anchor lines, extend regions to be scrolled both | |
4401 forward and backward. | |
4402 | |
4403 Value is | |
4404 | |
4405 -1 if all rows were found to be equal. | |
4406 0 to indicate that we did not scroll the display, or | |
4407 1 if we did scroll. */ | |
4408 | |
4409 static int | |
25546 | 4410 scrolling_window (w, header_line_p) |
25012 | 4411 struct window *w; |
25546 | 4412 int header_line_p; |
25012 | 4413 { |
4414 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = w->desired_matrix; | |
4415 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = w->current_matrix; | |
4416 int yb = window_text_bottom_y (w); | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4417 int i, j, first_old, first_new, last_old, last_new; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4418 int nruns, nbytes, n, run_idx; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4419 struct row_entry *entry; |
25012 | 4420 |
4421 /* Skip over rows equal at the start. */ | |
25546 | 4422 i = header_line_p ? 1 : 0; |
25012 | 4423 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 |
4424 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i) | |
4425 && MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i) | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4426 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) <= yb |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4427 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) <= yb |
25012 | 4428 && row_equal_p (w, |
4429 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i), | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4430 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), 1)) |
25012 | 4431 { |
4432 assign_row (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i), | |
4433 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); | |
4434 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p = 0; | |
4435 ++i; | |
4436 } | |
4437 | |
4438 /* Give up if some rows in the desired matrix are not enabled. */ | |
4439 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4440 return -1; | |
4441 | |
4442 first_old = first_new = i; | |
4443 | |
4444 /* Set last_new to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4445 desired matrix. */ | |
4446 i = first_new + 1; | |
4447 while (i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
4448 && MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4449 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)) <= yb) |
25012 | 4450 ++i; |
4451 | |
4452 if (!MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4453 return 0; | |
4454 | |
4455 last_new = i; | |
4456 | |
4457 /* Set last_old to the index + 1 of the last enabled row in the | |
4458 current matrix. We don't look at the enabled flag here because | |
4459 we plan to reuse part of the display even if other parts are | |
4460 disabled. */ | |
4461 i = first_old + 1; | |
4462 while (i < current_matrix->nrows - 1 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4463 && MATRIX_ROW_BOTTOM_Y (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)) <= yb) |
25012 | 4464 ++i; |
4465 last_old = i; | |
4466 | |
4467 /* Skip over rows equal at the bottom. */ | |
4468 i = last_new; | |
4469 j = last_old; | |
4470 while (i - 1 > first_new | |
4471 && j - 1 > first_old | |
4472 && MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->enabled_p | |
4473 && (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i - 1)->y | |
4474 == MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, j - 1)->y) | |
4475 && row_equal_p (w, | |
4476 MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i - 1), | |
30152
f6270e5282da
(direct_output_forward_char): Give up if currently
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30041
diff
changeset
|
4477 MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j - 1), 1)) |
25012 | 4478 --i, --j; |
4479 last_new = i; | |
4480 last_old = j; | |
4481 | |
4482 /* Nothing to do if all rows are equal. */ | |
4483 if (last_new == first_new) | |
4484 return 0; | |
4485 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4486 /* Reallocate vectors, tables etc. if necessary. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4487 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4488 if (current_matrix->nrows > old_lines_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4489 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4490 old_lines_size = current_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4491 nbytes = old_lines_size * sizeof *old_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4492 old_lines = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (old_lines, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4493 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4494 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4495 if (desired_matrix->nrows > new_lines_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4496 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4497 new_lines_size = desired_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4498 nbytes = new_lines_size * sizeof *new_lines; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4499 new_lines = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (new_lines, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4500 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4501 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4502 n = desired_matrix->nrows + current_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4503 if (3 * n > row_table_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4504 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4505 row_table_size = next_almost_prime (3 * n); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4506 nbytes = row_table_size * sizeof *row_table; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4507 row_table = (struct row_entry **) xrealloc (row_table, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4508 bzero (row_table, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4509 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4510 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4511 if (n > row_entry_pool_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4512 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4513 row_entry_pool_size = n; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4514 nbytes = row_entry_pool_size * sizeof *row_entry_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4515 row_entry_pool = (struct row_entry *) xrealloc (row_entry_pool, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4516 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4517 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4518 if (desired_matrix->nrows > runs_size) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4519 { |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4520 runs_size = desired_matrix->nrows; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4521 nbytes = runs_size * sizeof *runs; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4522 runs = (struct run **) xrealloc (runs, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4523 nbytes = runs_size * sizeof *run_pool; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4524 run_pool = (struct run *) xrealloc (run_pool, nbytes); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4525 } |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4526 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4527 nruns = run_idx = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4528 row_entry_idx = 0; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4529 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4530 /* Add rows from the current and desired matrix to the hash table |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4531 row_hash_table to be able to find equal ones quickly. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4532 |
25012 | 4533 for (i = first_old; i < last_old; ++i) |
4534 { | |
4535 if (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->enabled_p) | |
4536 { | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4537 entry = add_row_entry (w, MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4538 old_lines[i] = entry; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4539 ++entry->old_uses; |
25012 | 4540 } |
4541 else | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4542 old_lines[i] = NULL; |
25012 | 4543 } |
4544 | |
4545 for (i = first_new; i < last_new; ++i) | |
4546 { | |
4547 xassert (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)); | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4548 entry = add_row_entry (w, MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4549 ++entry->new_uses; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4550 entry->new_line_number = i; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4551 new_lines[i] = entry; |
25012 | 4552 } |
4553 | |
4554 /* Identify moves based on lines that are unique and equal | |
4555 in both matrices. */ | |
4556 for (i = first_old; i < last_old;) | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4557 if (old_lines[i] |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4558 && old_lines[i]->old_uses == 1 |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4559 && old_lines[i]->new_uses == 1) |
25012 | 4560 { |
4561 int j, k; | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4562 int new_line = old_lines[i]->new_line_number; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4563 struct run *run = run_pool + run_idx++; |
25012 | 4564 |
4565 /* Record move. */ | |
4566 run->current_vpos = i; | |
4567 run->current_y = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->y; | |
4568 run->desired_vpos = new_line; | |
4569 run->desired_y = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, new_line)->y; | |
4570 run->nrows = 1; | |
4571 run->height = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)->height; | |
4572 | |
4573 /* Extend backward. */ | |
4574 j = i - 1; | |
4575 k = new_line - 1; | |
4576 while (j > first_old | |
4577 && k > first_new | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4578 && old_lines[j] == new_lines[k]) |
25012 | 4579 { |
4580 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4581 --run->current_vpos; | |
4582 --run->desired_vpos; | |
4583 ++run->nrows; | |
4584 run->height += h; | |
4585 run->desired_y -= h; | |
4586 run->current_y -= h; | |
4587 --j, --k; | |
4588 } | |
4589 | |
4590 /* Extend forward. */ | |
4591 j = i + 1; | |
4592 k = new_line + 1; | |
4593 while (j < last_old | |
4594 && k < last_new | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4595 && old_lines[j] == new_lines[k]) |
25012 | 4596 { |
4597 int h = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, j)->height; | |
4598 ++run->nrows; | |
4599 run->height += h; | |
4600 ++j, ++k; | |
4601 } | |
4602 | |
4603 /* Insert run into list of all runs. Order runs by copied | |
4604 pixel lines. Note that we record runs that don't have to | |
4605 be copied because they are already in place. This is done | |
4606 because we can avoid calling update_window_line in this | |
4607 case. */ | |
4608 for (j = 0; j < nruns && runs[j]->height > run->height; ++j) | |
4609 ; | |
4610 for (k = nruns; k >= j; --k) | |
4611 runs[k] = runs[k - 1]; | |
4612 runs[j] = run; | |
4613 ++nruns; | |
4614 | |
4615 i += run->nrows; | |
4616 } | |
4617 else | |
4618 ++i; | |
4619 | |
4620 /* Do the moves. Do it in a way that we don't overwrite something | |
4621 we want to copy later on. This is not solvable in general | |
4622 because there is only one display and we don't have a way to | |
4623 exchange areas on this display. Example: | |
4624 | |
4625 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4626 | A | | B | | |
4627 +-----------+ --> +-----------+ | |
4628 | B | | A | | |
4629 +-----------+ +-----------+ | |
4630 | |
4631 Instead, prefer bigger moves, and invalidate moves that would | |
4632 copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4633 | |
4634 for (i = 0; i < nruns; ++i) | |
4635 if (runs[i]->nrows > 0) | |
4636 { | |
4637 struct run *r = runs[i]; | |
4638 | |
4639 /* Copy on the display. */ | |
4640 if (r->current_y != r->desired_y) | |
4641 { | |
4642 rif->scroll_run_hook (w, r); | |
4643 | |
4644 /* Invalidate runs that copy from where we copied to. */ | |
4645 for (j = i + 1; j < nruns; ++j) | |
4646 { | |
4647 struct run *p = runs[j]; | |
4648 | |
4649 if ((p->current_y >= r->desired_y | |
4650 && p->current_y < r->desired_y + r->height) | |
4651 || (p->current_y + p->height >= r->desired_y | |
4652 && (p->current_y + p->height | |
4653 < r->desired_y + r->height))) | |
4654 p->nrows = 0; | |
4655 } | |
4656 } | |
4657 | |
4658 /* Assign matrix rows. */ | |
4659 for (j = 0; j < r->nrows; ++j) | |
4660 { | |
4661 struct glyph_row *from, *to; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4662 int to_overlapped_p; |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4663 |
25012 | 4664 to = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
30161
8be2bf27e9ad
(make_current): Preserve the mouse_face_p flag of the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30152
diff
changeset
|
4665 from = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, r->desired_vpos + j); |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4666 to_overlapped_p = to->overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4667 assign_row (to, from); |
4668 to->enabled_p = 1, from->enabled_p = 0; | |
25186
d6c941334567
(redraw_overlapping_rows): Use flag overlapping_p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25118
diff
changeset
|
4669 to->overlapped_p = to_overlapped_p; |
25012 | 4670 } |
4671 } | |
4672 | |
29980
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4673 /* Clear the hash table, for the next time. */ |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4674 for (i = 0; i < row_entry_idx; ++i) |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4675 row_table[row_entry_pool[i].bucket] = NULL; |
171ba59e1cb0
(struct row_entry): New structure.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29687
diff
changeset
|
4676 |
25012 | 4677 /* Value is non-zero to indicate that we scrolled the display. */ |
4678 return 1; | |
4679 } | |
4680 | |
4681 | |
4682 | |
4683 /************************************************************************ | |
4684 Frame-Based Updates | |
4685 ************************************************************************/ | |
4686 | |
4687 /* Update the desired frame matrix of frame F. | |
4688 | |
4689 FORCE_P non-zero means that the update should not be stopped by | |
4690 pending input. INHIBIT_HAIRY_ID_P non-zero means that scrolling | |
4691 should not be tried. | |
4692 | |
4693 Value is non-zero if update was stopped due to pending input. */ | |
4694 | |
4695 static int | |
4696 update_frame_1 (f, force_p, inhibit_id_p) | |
4697 struct frame *f; | |
4698 int force_p; | |
4699 int inhibit_id_p; | |
4700 { | |
4701 /* Frame matrices to work on. */ | |
4702 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = f->current_matrix; | |
4703 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = f->desired_matrix; | |
4704 int i; | |
314 | 4705 int pause; |
4706 int preempt_count = baud_rate / 2400 + 1; | |
21514 | 4707 extern int input_pending; |
25012 | 4708 |
4709 xassert (current_matrix && desired_matrix); | |
314 | 4710 |
10122
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4711 if (baud_rate != FRAME_COST_BAUD_RATE (f)) |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4712 calculate_costs (f); |
3de6776ae141
(update_frame): Call calculate_costs if baud_rate changed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
9963
diff
changeset
|
4713 |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4714 if (preempt_count <= 0) |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4715 preempt_count = 1; |
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4716 |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4717 if (redisplay_dont_pause) |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4718 force_p = 1; |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
4719 else if (!force_p && detect_input_pending ()) |
314 | 4720 { |
4721 pause = 1; | |
4722 goto do_pause; | |
4723 } | |
4724 | |
25012 | 4725 /* If we cannot insert/delete lines, it's no use trying it. */ |
314 | 4726 if (!line_ins_del_ok) |
25012 | 4727 inhibit_id_p = 1; |
7188
7da4ad9a2a8f
(update_frame): Move those assignments even farther down.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7179
diff
changeset
|
4728 |
493 | 4729 /* See if any of the desired lines are enabled; don't compute for |
25012 | 4730 i/d line if just want cursor motion. */ |
4731 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows; i++) | |
4732 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
314 | 4733 break; |
4734 | |
4735 /* Try doing i/d line, if not yet inhibited. */ | |
25012 | 4736 if (!inhibit_id_p && i < desired_matrix->nrows) |
4737 force_p |= scrolling (f); | |
314 | 4738 |
4739 /* Update the individual lines as needed. Do bottom line first. */ | |
25012 | 4740 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, desired_matrix->nrows - 1)) |
4741 update_frame_line (f, desired_matrix->nrows - 1); | |
4742 | |
4743 /* Now update the rest of the lines. */ | |
4744 for (i = 0; i < desired_matrix->nrows - 1 && (force_p || !input_pending); i++) | |
314 | 4745 { |
25012 | 4746 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4747 { |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
4748 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f)) |
314 | 4749 { |
4750 /* Flush out every so many lines. | |
4751 Also flush out if likely to have more than 1k buffered | |
4752 otherwise. I'm told that some telnet connections get | |
4753 really screwed by more than 1k output at once. */ | |
4754 int outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); | |
4755 if (outq > 900 | |
4756 || (outq > 20 && ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0))) | |
4757 { | |
4758 fflush (stdout); | |
4759 if (preempt_count == 1) | |
4760 { | |
554 | 4761 #ifdef EMACS_OUTQSIZE |
4762 if (EMACS_OUTQSIZE (0, &outq) < 0) | |
314 | 4763 /* Probably not a tty. Ignore the error and reset |
25012 | 4764 * the outq count. */ |
314 | 4765 outq = PENDING_OUTPUT_COUNT (stdout); |
4766 #endif | |
4767 outq *= 10; | |
7530
57c2345a9002
(update_frame): Fix test of outq and baud_rate some more.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7529
diff
changeset
|
4768 if (baud_rate <= outq && baud_rate > 0) |
3357
d9523a958b3c
(update_frame): Make preempt_count positive.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3317
diff
changeset
|
4769 sleep (outq / baud_rate); |
314 | 4770 } |
4771 } | |
4772 } | |
4773 | |
16822
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4774 if ((i - 1) % preempt_count == 0) |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4775 detect_input_pending (); |
483e137d5384
(update_frame): Call detect_input_pending
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16589
diff
changeset
|
4776 |
25012 | 4777 update_frame_line (f, i); |
314 | 4778 } |
4779 } | |
25012 | 4780 |
764 | 4781 pause = (i < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) ? i : 0; |
314 | 4782 |
4783 /* Now just clean up termcap drivers and set cursor, etc. */ | |
4784 if (!pause) | |
4785 { | |
12409
6e374b28ecc3
(update_frame): Pretend cursor is in echo area
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12193
diff
changeset
|
4786 if ((cursor_in_echo_area |
25012 | 4787 /* If we are showing a message instead of the mini-buffer, |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4788 show the cursor for the message instead of for the |
25012 | 4789 (now hidden) mini-buffer contents. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4790 || (EQ (minibuf_window, selected_window) |
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4791 && EQ (minibuf_window, echo_area_window) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
4792 && !NILP (echo_area_buffer[0]))) |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4793 /* These cases apply only to the frame that contains |
25012 | 4794 the active mini-buffer window. */ |
12627
c7bc7a24b1ff
(update_frame): Check that the echo area is in the frame being displayed.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
12532
diff
changeset
|
4795 && FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) |
14459
c1d25453a95f
(update_frame): Compare FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW(f)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14286
diff
changeset
|
4796 && EQ (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), echo_area_window)) |
708 | 4797 { |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4798 int top = XINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4799 int row, col; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4800 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4801 if (cursor_in_echo_area < 0) |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4802 { |
25012 | 4803 /* Negative value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4804 cursor at beginning of line. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4805 row = top; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4806 col = 0; |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4807 } |
708 | 4808 else |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4809 { |
25012 | 4810 /* Positive value of cursor_in_echo_area means put |
4811 cursor at the end of the prompt. If the mini-buffer | |
4812 is several lines high, find the last line that has | |
4813 any text on it. */ | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4814 row = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4815 do |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4816 { |
25012 | 4817 --row; |
4818 col = 0; | |
4819 | |
4820 if (MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, row)) | |
4821 { | |
4822 /* Frame rows are filled up with spaces that | |
4823 must be ignored here. */ | |
4824 struct glyph_row *r = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, | |
4825 row); | |
4826 struct glyph *start = r->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4827 struct glyph *last = start + r->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
4828 | |
4829 while (last > start | |
4830 && (last - 1)->charpos < 0) | |
4831 --last; | |
4832 | |
4833 col = last - start; | |
4834 } | |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4835 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4836 while (row > top && col == 0); |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4837 |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4838 /* Make sure COL is not out of range. */ |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4839 if (col >= FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f)) |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4840 { |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4841 /* If we have another row, advance cursor into it. */ |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4842 if (row < FRAME_HEIGHT (f) - 1) |
21757
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4843 { |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4844 col = FRAME_LEFT_SCROLL_BAR_WIDTH (f); |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4845 row++; |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4846 } |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4847 /* Otherwise move it back in range. */ |
629f6df4a329
(update_frame): Move echo area cursor into range.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21514
diff
changeset
|
4848 else |
21763
b685f9451792
(change_frame_size_1): Use FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
21757
diff
changeset
|
4849 col = FRAME_CURSOR_X_LIMIT (f) - 1; |
1042
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4850 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4851 } |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4852 |
41b77a76b885
* dispnew.c: Incude "systty.h", not "systerm.h".
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1003
diff
changeset
|
4853 cursor_to (row, col); |
708 | 4854 } |
314 | 4855 else |
25012 | 4856 { |
4857 /* We have only one cursor on terminal frames. Use it to | |
4858 display the cursor of the selected window. */ | |
4859 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
29687
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4860 if (w->cursor.vpos >= 0 |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4861 /* The cursor vpos may be temporarily out of bounds |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4862 in the following situation: There is one window, |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4863 with the cursor in the lower half of it. The window |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4864 is split, and a message causes a redisplay before |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4865 a new cursor position has been computed. */ |
5d67ef29764b
(update_frame_1): Handle case that cursor vpos is
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
29437
diff
changeset
|
4866 && w->cursor.vpos < XFASTINT (w->height)) |
25012 | 4867 { |
4868 int x = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_HPOS (w, w->cursor.hpos); | |
4869 int y = WINDOW_TO_FRAME_VPOS (w, w->cursor.vpos); | |
4870 | |
4871 if (INTEGERP (w->left_margin_width)) | |
4872 x += XFASTINT (w->left_margin_width); | |
4873 | |
4874 /* x = max (min (x, FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f) - 1), 0); */ | |
4875 cursor_to (y, x); | |
4876 } | |
4877 } | |
314 | 4878 } |
4879 | |
4880 do_pause: | |
4881 | |
25012 | 4882 clear_desired_matrices (f); |
314 | 4883 return pause; |
4884 } | |
4885 | |
25012 | 4886 |
4887 /* Do line insertions/deletions on frame F for frame-based redisplay. */ | |
314 | 4888 |
21514 | 4889 int |
764 | 4890 scrolling (frame) |
25012 | 4891 struct frame *frame; |
314 | 4892 { |
4893 int unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom; | |
4894 int window_size; | |
4895 int changed_lines; | |
764 | 4896 int *old_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
4897 int *new_hash = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
4898 int *draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); | |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4899 int *old_draw_cost = (int *) alloca (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) * sizeof (int)); |
314 | 4900 register int i; |
764 | 4901 int free_at_end_vpos = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
25012 | 4902 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
4903 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
4904 | |
4905 if (!current_matrix) | |
4906 abort (); | |
4907 | |
4908 /* Compute hash codes of all the lines. Also calculate number of | |
4909 changed lines, number of unchanged lines at the beginning, and | |
4910 number of unchanged lines at the end. */ | |
314 | 4911 changed_lines = 0; |
4912 unchanged_at_top = 0; | |
764 | 4913 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); |
4914 for (i = 0; i < FRAME_HEIGHT (frame); i++) | |
314 | 4915 { |
4916 /* Give up on this scrolling if some old lines are not enabled. */ | |
25012 | 4917 if (!MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (current_matrix, i)) |
314 | 4918 return 0; |
25012 | 4919 old_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, i)); |
4920 if (! MATRIX_ROW_ENABLED_P (desired_matrix, i)) | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4921 { |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4922 /* This line cannot be redrawn, so don't let scrolling mess it. */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4923 new_hash[i] = old_hash[i]; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4924 #define INFINITY 1000000 /* Taken from scroll.c */ |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4925 draw_cost[i] = INFINITY; |
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4926 } |
314 | 4927 else |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4928 { |
25012 | 4929 new_hash[i] = line_hash_code (MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, i)); |
4930 draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (desired_matrix, i); | |
18015
934a44a3b34f
(scrolling): If a line is not enabled,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17961
diff
changeset
|
4931 } |
314 | 4932 |
4933 if (old_hash[i] != new_hash[i]) | |
4934 { | |
4935 changed_lines++; | |
764 | 4936 unchanged_at_bottom = FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - i - 1; |
314 | 4937 } |
4938 else if (i == unchanged_at_top) | |
4939 unchanged_at_top++; | |
25012 | 4940 old_draw_cost[i] = line_draw_cost (current_matrix, i); |
314 | 4941 } |
4942 | |
4943 /* If changed lines are few, don't allow preemption, don't scroll. */ | |
25012 | 4944 if ((!scroll_region_ok && changed_lines < baud_rate / 2400) |
764 | 4945 || unchanged_at_bottom == FRAME_HEIGHT (frame)) |
314 | 4946 return 1; |
4947 | |
764 | 4948 window_size = (FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_top |
314 | 4949 - unchanged_at_bottom); |
4950 | |
4951 if (scroll_region_ok) | |
4952 free_at_end_vpos -= unchanged_at_bottom; | |
764 | 4953 else if (memory_below_frame) |
314 | 4954 free_at_end_vpos = -1; |
4955 | |
4956 /* If large window, fast terminal and few lines in common between | |
25012 | 4957 current frame and desired frame, don't bother with i/d calc. */ |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4958 if (!scroll_region_ok && window_size >= 18 && baud_rate > 2400 |
314 | 4959 && (window_size >= |
4960 10 * scrolling_max_lines_saved (unchanged_at_top, | |
764 | 4961 FRAME_HEIGHT (frame) - unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4962 old_hash, new_hash, draw_cost))) |
4963 return 0; | |
4964 | |
25012 | 4965 if (window_size < 2) |
4966 return 0; | |
4967 | |
764 | 4968 scrolling_1 (frame, window_size, unchanged_at_top, unchanged_at_bottom, |
314 | 4969 draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
10259
48e4dfc6bb43
(scrolling): Fewer restrictions if scroll_region_ok is
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10122
diff
changeset
|
4970 old_draw_cost + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
314 | 4971 old_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, |
4972 new_hash + unchanged_at_top - 1, | |
4973 free_at_end_vpos - unchanged_at_top); | |
4974 | |
4975 return 0; | |
4976 } | |
25012 | 4977 |
4978 | |
4979 /* Count the number of blanks at the start of the vector of glyphs R | |
4980 which is LEN glyphs long. */ | |
4981 | |
4982 static int | |
4983 count_blanks (r, len) | |
4984 struct glyph *r; | |
4985 int len; | |
314 | 4986 { |
25012 | 4987 int i; |
4988 | |
4989 for (i = 0; i < len; ++i) | |
4990 if (!CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (r[i])) | |
4991 break; | |
4992 | |
4993 return i; | |
314 | 4994 } |
25012 | 4995 |
4996 | |
4997 /* Count the number of glyphs in common at the start of the glyph | |
4998 vectors STR1 and STR2. END1 is the end of STR1 and END2 is the end | |
4999 of STR2. Value is the number of equal glyphs equal at the start. */ | |
314 | 5000 |
5001 static int | |
25012 | 5002 count_match (str1, end1, str2, end2) |
5003 struct glyph *str1, *end1, *str2, *end2; | |
314 | 5004 { |
25012 | 5005 struct glyph *p1 = str1; |
5006 struct glyph *p2 = str2; | |
5007 | |
5008 while (p1 < end1 | |
5009 && p2 < end2 | |
26998
02e902f732d1
(line_hash_code) (direct_output_for_insert): Adjusted
Kenichi Handa <handa@m17n.org>
parents:
26902
diff
changeset
|
5010 && GLYPH_CHAR_AND_FACE_EQUAL_P (p1, p2)) |
25012 | 5011 ++p1, ++p2; |
5012 | |
5013 return p1 - str1; | |
314 | 5014 } |
5015 | |
25012 | 5016 |
314 | 5017 /* Char insertion/deletion cost vector, from term.c */ |
25012 | 5018 |
314 | 5019 extern int *char_ins_del_vector; |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5020 #define char_ins_del_cost(f) (&char_ins_del_vector[FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH((f))]) |
314 | 5021 |
25012 | 5022 |
5023 /* Perform a frame-based update on line VPOS in frame FRAME. */ | |
5024 | |
314 | 5025 static void |
25012 | 5026 update_frame_line (frame, vpos) |
5027 register struct frame *frame; | |
314 | 5028 int vpos; |
5029 { | |
25012 | 5030 struct glyph *obody, *nbody, *op1, *op2, *np1, *nend; |
314 | 5031 int tem; |
5032 int osp, nsp, begmatch, endmatch, olen, nlen; | |
25012 | 5033 struct glyph_matrix *current_matrix = frame->current_matrix; |
5034 struct glyph_matrix *desired_matrix = frame->desired_matrix; | |
5035 struct glyph_row *current_row = MATRIX_ROW (current_matrix, vpos); | |
5036 struct glyph_row *desired_row = MATRIX_ROW (desired_matrix, vpos); | |
5037 int must_write_whole_line_p; | |
5038 | |
5039 if (desired_row->inverse_p | |
5040 != (current_row->enabled_p && current_row->inverse_p)) | |
314 | 5041 { |
25012 | 5042 int n = current_row->enabled_p ? current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] : 0; |
5043 change_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos, vpos, n); | |
5044 current_row->enabled_p = 0; | |
314 | 5045 } |
5046 else | |
25012 | 5047 reassert_line_highlight (desired_row->inverse_p, vpos); |
5048 | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5049 /* Current row not enabled means it has unknown contents. We must |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5050 write the whole desired line in that case. */ |
25012 | 5051 must_write_whole_line_p = !current_row->enabled_p; |
5052 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
314 | 5053 { |
25012 | 5054 obody = 0; |
314 | 5055 olen = 0; |
5056 } | |
5057 else | |
5058 { | |
25012 | 5059 obody = MATRIX_ROW_GLYPH_START (current_matrix, vpos); |
5060 olen = current_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5061 | |
5062 if (! current_row->inverse_p) | |
314 | 5063 { |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5064 /* Ignore trailing spaces, if we can. */ |
314 | 5065 if (!must_write_spaces) |
25012 | 5066 while (olen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (obody[olen-1])) |
314 | 5067 olen--; |
5068 } | |
5069 else | |
5070 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5071 /* For an inverse-video line, make sure it's filled with |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5072 spaces all the way to the frame edge so that the reverse |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5073 video extends all the way across. */ |
25012 | 5074 while (olen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) |
5075 obody[olen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5076 } |
5077 } | |
5078 | |
25012 | 5079 current_row->enabled_p = 1; |
5080 current_row->used[TEXT_AREA] = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5081 current_row->inverse_p = desired_row->inverse_p; | |
5082 | |
5083 /* If desired line is empty, just clear the line. */ | |
5084 if (!desired_row->enabled_p) | |
314 | 5085 { |
5086 nlen = 0; | |
5087 goto just_erase; | |
5088 } | |
5089 | |
25012 | 5090 nbody = desired_row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; |
5091 nlen = desired_row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5092 nend = nbody + nlen; | |
5093 | |
5094 /* If display line has unknown contents, write the whole line. */ | |
5095 if (must_write_whole_line_p) | |
5096 { | |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5097 /* Ignore spaces at the end, if we can. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5098 if (!must_write_spaces) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5099 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5100 --nlen; |
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5101 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5102 /* Write the contents of the desired line. */ |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5103 if (nlen) |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5104 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5105 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5106 write_glyphs (nbody, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5107 } |
25313
6b4475fbef86
(update_frame_line): If writing whole line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25304
diff
changeset
|
5108 |
25725
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5109 /* Don't call clear_end_of_line if we already wrote the whole |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5110 line. The cursor will not be at the right margin in that |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5111 case but in the line below. */ |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5112 if (nlen < FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5113 { |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5114 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5115 clear_end_of_line (FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)); |
b7468dc89ccb
(update_frame_line): If writing whole desired line,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25666
diff
changeset
|
5116 } |
28682
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5117 else |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5118 /* Make sure we are in the right row, otherwise cursor movement |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5119 with cmgoto might use `ch' in the wrong row. */ |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5120 cursor_to (vpos, 0); |
f05d48759416
(update_frame_line): When writing a whole line, make
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
28507
diff
changeset
|
5121 |
25012 | 5122 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
5123 return; | |
5124 } | |
314 | 5125 |
5126 /* Pretend trailing spaces are not there at all, | |
5127 unless for one reason or another we must write all spaces. */ | |
25012 | 5128 if (!desired_row->inverse_p) |
314 | 5129 { |
5130 if (!must_write_spaces) | |
25012 | 5131 while (nlen > 0 && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (nbody[nlen - 1])) |
314 | 5132 nlen--; |
5133 } | |
5134 else | |
5135 { | |
25012 | 5136 /* For an inverse-video line, give it extra trailing spaces all |
5137 the way to the frame edge so that the reverse video extends | |
5138 all the way across. */ | |
5139 while (nlen < FRAME_WIDTH (frame) - 1) | |
5140 nbody[nlen++] = space_glyph; | |
314 | 5141 } |
5142 | |
5143 /* If there's no i/d char, quickly do the best we can without it. */ | |
5144 if (!char_ins_del_ok) | |
5145 { | |
25012 | 5146 int i, j; |
5147 | |
5148 /* Find the first glyph in desired row that doesn't agree with | |
5149 a glyph in the current row, and write the rest from there on. */ | |
314 | 5150 for (i = 0; i < nlen; i++) |
5151 { | |
25012 | 5152 if (i >= olen || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + i, obody + i)) |
314 | 5153 { |
25012 | 5154 /* Find the end of the run of different glyphs. */ |
5155 j = i + 1; | |
5156 while (j < nlen | |
5157 && (j >= olen | |
5158 || !GLYPH_EQUAL_P (nbody + j, obody + j) | |
5159 || CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[j]))) | |
5160 ++j; | |
5161 | |
5162 /* Output this run of non-matching chars. */ | |
314 | 5163 cursor_to (vpos, i); |
25012 | 5164 write_glyphs (nbody + i, j - i); |
5165 i = j - 1; | |
314 | 5166 |
5167 /* Now find the next non-match. */ | |
5168 } | |
5169 } | |
5170 | |
5171 /* Clear the rest of the line, or the non-clear part of it. */ | |
5172 if (olen > nlen) | |
5173 { | |
5174 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5175 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5176 } | |
5177 | |
25012 | 5178 /* Make current row = desired row. */ |
5179 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); | |
314 | 5180 return; |
5181 } | |
5182 | |
25012 | 5183 /* Here when CHAR_INS_DEL_OK != 0, i.e. we can insert or delete |
5184 characters in a row. */ | |
5185 | |
314 | 5186 if (!olen) |
5187 { | |
25012 | 5188 /* If current line is blank, skip over initial spaces, if |
5189 possible, and write the rest. */ | |
5190 if (must_write_spaces || desired_row->inverse_p) | |
5191 nsp = 0; | |
5192 else | |
5193 nsp = count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5194 | |
314 | 5195 if (nlen > nsp) |
5196 { | |
5197 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5198 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp, nlen - nsp); | |
5199 } | |
5200 | |
764 | 5201 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5202 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5203 return; |
5204 } | |
5205 | |
5206 /* Compute number of leading blanks in old and new contents. */ | |
25012 | 5207 osp = count_blanks (obody, olen); |
5208 nsp = desired_row->inverse_p ? 0 : count_blanks (nbody, nlen); | |
5209 | |
5210 /* Compute number of matching chars starting with first non-blank. */ | |
5211 begmatch = count_match (obody + osp, obody + olen, | |
5212 nbody + nsp, nbody + nlen); | |
314 | 5213 |
5214 /* Spaces in new match implicit space past the end of old. */ | |
5215 /* A bug causing this to be a no-op was fixed in 18.29. */ | |
5216 if (!must_write_spaces && osp + begmatch == olen) | |
5217 { | |
5218 np1 = nbody + nsp; | |
25012 | 5219 while (np1 + begmatch < nend && CHAR_GLYPH_SPACE_P (np1[begmatch])) |
5220 ++begmatch; | |
314 | 5221 } |
5222 | |
5223 /* Avoid doing insert/delete char | |
5224 just cause number of leading spaces differs | |
25012 | 5225 when the following text does not match. */ |
314 | 5226 if (begmatch == 0 && osp != nsp) |
5227 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5228 | |
5229 /* Find matching characters at end of line */ | |
5230 op1 = obody + olen; | |
5231 np1 = nbody + nlen; | |
5232 op2 = op1 + begmatch - min (olen - osp, nlen - nsp); | |
25012 | 5233 while (op1 > op2 |
5234 && GLYPH_EQUAL_P (op1 - 1, np1 - 1)) | |
314 | 5235 { |
5236 op1--; | |
5237 np1--; | |
5238 } | |
5239 endmatch = obody + olen - op1; | |
5240 | |
5241 /* tem gets the distance to insert or delete. | |
5242 endmatch is how many characters we save by doing so. | |
5243 Is it worth it? */ | |
5244 | |
5245 tem = (nlen - nsp) - (olen - osp); | |
5246 if (endmatch && tem | |
764 | 5247 && (!char_ins_del_ok || endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[tem])) |
314 | 5248 endmatch = 0; |
5249 | |
5250 /* nsp - osp is the distance to insert or delete. | |
5251 If that is nonzero, begmatch is known to be nonzero also. | |
5252 begmatch + endmatch is how much we save by doing the ins/del. | |
5253 Is it worth it? */ | |
5254 | |
5255 if (nsp != osp | |
5256 && (!char_ins_del_ok | |
764 | 5257 || begmatch + endmatch <= char_ins_del_cost (frame)[nsp - osp])) |
314 | 5258 { |
5259 begmatch = 0; | |
5260 endmatch = 0; | |
5261 osp = nsp = min (osp, nsp); | |
5262 } | |
5263 | |
5264 /* Now go through the line, inserting, writing and | |
5265 deleting as appropriate. */ | |
5266 | |
5267 if (osp > nsp) | |
5268 { | |
5269 cursor_to (vpos, nsp); | |
5270 delete_glyphs (osp - nsp); | |
5271 } | |
5272 else if (nsp > osp) | |
5273 { | |
5274 /* If going to delete chars later in line | |
5275 and insert earlier in the line, | |
5276 must delete first to avoid losing data in the insert */ | |
5277 if (endmatch && nlen < olen + nsp - osp) | |
5278 { | |
5279 cursor_to (vpos, nlen - endmatch + osp - nsp); | |
5280 delete_glyphs (olen + nsp - osp - nlen); | |
5281 olen = nlen - (nsp - osp); | |
5282 } | |
5283 cursor_to (vpos, osp); | |
25012 | 5284 insert_glyphs (0, nsp - osp); |
314 | 5285 } |
5286 olen += nsp - osp; | |
5287 | |
5288 tem = nsp + begmatch + endmatch; | |
5289 if (nlen != tem || olen != tem) | |
5290 { | |
5291 cursor_to (vpos, nsp + begmatch); | |
5292 if (!endmatch || nlen == olen) | |
5293 { | |
5294 /* If new text being written reaches right margin, | |
5295 there is no need to do clear-to-eol at the end. | |
5296 (and it would not be safe, since cursor is not | |
5297 going to be "at the margin" after the text is done) */ | |
16267
05ca2cb9fe0f
(make_frame_glyphs, update_line, update_frame)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16256
diff
changeset
|
5298 if (nlen == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (frame)) |
314 | 5299 olen = 0; |
5300 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5301 } | |
5302 else if (nlen > olen) | |
5303 { | |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5304 /* Here, we used to have the following simple code: |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5305 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5306 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, olen - tem); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5307 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + olen - tem, nlen - olen); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5308 ---------------------------------------- |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5309 but it doesn't work if nbody[nsp + begmatch + olen - tem] |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5310 is a padding glyph. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5311 int out = olen - tem; /* Columns to be overwritten originally. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5312 int del; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5313 |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5314 /* Calculate columns we can actually overwrite. */ |
25012 | 5315 while (CHAR_GLYPH_PADDING_P (nbody[nsp + begmatch + out])) out--; |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5316 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, out); |
25012 | 5317 /* If we left columns to be overwritten, we must delete them. */ |
17015
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5318 del = olen - tem - out; |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5319 if (del > 0) delete_glyphs (del); |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5320 /* At last, we insert columns not yet written out. */ |
fe0b3661b584
(direct_output_forward_char): #if-0-out redundant
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
16896
diff
changeset
|
5321 insert_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch + out, nlen - olen + del); |
314 | 5322 olen = nlen; |
5323 } | |
5324 else if (olen > nlen) | |
5325 { | |
5326 write_glyphs (nbody + nsp + begmatch, nlen - tem); | |
5327 delete_glyphs (olen - nlen); | |
5328 olen = nlen; | |
5329 } | |
5330 } | |
5331 | |
5332 just_erase: | |
5333 /* If any unerased characters remain after the new line, erase them. */ | |
5334 if (olen > nlen) | |
5335 { | |
5336 cursor_to (vpos, nlen); | |
5337 clear_end_of_line (olen); | |
5338 } | |
5339 | |
764 | 5340 /* Exchange contents between current_frame and new_frame. */ |
25012 | 5341 make_current (desired_matrix, current_matrix, vpos); |
314 | 5342 } |
25012 | 5343 |
5344 | |
314 | 5345 |
25012 | 5346 /*********************************************************************** |
5347 X/Y Position -> Buffer Position | |
5348 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5349 | |
5350 /* Return the character position of the character at window relative | |
5351 pixel position (*X, *Y). *X and *Y are adjusted to character | |
5352 boundaries. */ | |
5353 | |
5354 int | |
5355 buffer_posn_from_coords (w, x, y) | |
5356 struct window *w; | |
5357 int *x, *y; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5358 { |
25012 | 5359 struct it it; |
5360 struct buffer *old_current_buffer = current_buffer; | |
5361 struct text_pos startp; | |
5362 int left_area_width; | |
5363 | |
5364 current_buffer = XBUFFER (w->buffer); | |
5365 SET_TEXT_POS_FROM_MARKER (startp, w->start); | |
5366 CHARPOS (startp) = min (ZV, max (BEGV, CHARPOS (startp))); | |
5367 BYTEPOS (startp) = min (ZV_BYTE, max (BEGV_BYTE, BYTEPOS (startp))); | |
5368 start_display (&it, w, startp); | |
5369 | |
5370 left_area_width = WINDOW_DISPLAY_LEFT_AREA_PIXEL_WIDTH (w); | |
5371 move_it_to (&it, -1, *x + it.first_visible_x - left_area_width, *y, -1, | |
5372 MOVE_TO_X | MOVE_TO_Y); | |
5373 | |
5374 *x = it.current_x - it.first_visible_x + left_area_width; | |
5375 *y = it.current_y; | |
5376 current_buffer = old_current_buffer; | |
5377 return IT_CHARPOS (it); | |
5378 } | |
5379 | |
5380 | |
5381 /* Value is the string under window-relative coordinates X/Y in the | |
5382 mode or top line of window W, or nil if none. MODE_LINE_P non-zero | |
5383 means look at the mode line. *CHARPOS is set to the position in | |
5384 the string returned. */ | |
5385 | |
5386 Lisp_Object | |
5387 mode_line_string (w, x, y, mode_line_p, charpos) | |
5388 struct window *w; | |
30713
fee809f81f97
(mode_line_string): Declare parameter MODE_LINE_P.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30323
diff
changeset
|
5389 int x, y, mode_line_p; |
25012 | 5390 int *charpos; |
5391 { | |
5392 struct glyph_row *row; | |
5393 struct glyph *glyph, *end; | |
5394 struct frame *f = XFRAME (w->frame); | |
5395 int x0; | |
5396 Lisp_Object string = Qnil; | |
5397 | |
5398 if (mode_line_p) | |
5399 row = MATRIX_MODE_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); | |
5400 else | |
25546 | 5401 row = MATRIX_HEADER_LINE_ROW (w->current_matrix); |
25012 | 5402 |
5403 if (row->mode_line_p && row->enabled_p) | |
11919
31cb053405f2
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Record frame names
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11914
diff
changeset
|
5404 { |
25012 | 5405 /* The mode lines are displayed over scroll bars and bitmap |
5406 areas, and X is window-relative. Correct X by the scroll bar | |
5407 and bitmap area width. */ | |
5408 if (FRAME_HAS_VERTICAL_SCROLL_BARS_ON_LEFT (f)) | |
5409 x += FRAME_SCROLL_BAR_COLS (f) * CANON_X_UNIT (f); | |
25459
293b78b9ff60
(mode_line_string): Add FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25385
diff
changeset
|
5410 x += FRAME_LEFT_FLAGS_AREA_WIDTH (f); |
25012 | 5411 |
5412 /* Find the glyph under X. If we find one with a string object, | |
5413 it's the one we were looking for. */ | |
5414 glyph = row->glyphs[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5415 end = glyph + row->used[TEXT_AREA]; | |
5416 for (x0 = 0; glyph < end; x0 += glyph->pixel_width, ++glyph) | |
5417 if (x >= x0 && x < x0 + glyph->pixel_width) | |
5418 { | |
5419 string = glyph->object; | |
5420 *charpos = glyph->charpos; | |
5421 break; | |
5422 } | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5423 } |
25012 | 5424 |
5425 return string; | |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
5426 } |
25012 | 5427 |
5428 | |
5429 /*********************************************************************** | |
5430 Changing Frame Sizes | |
5431 ***********************************************************************/ | |
314 | 5432 |
5433 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
25012 | 5434 |
493 | 5435 SIGTYPE |
10745
a553a08f5785
(window_change_signal): Add ignored argument.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10259
diff
changeset
|
5436 window_change_signal (signalnum) /* If we don't have an argument, */ |
25012 | 5437 int signalnum; /* some compilers complain in signal calls. */ |
314 | 5438 { |
5439 int width, height; | |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
5440 #ifndef USE_CRT_DLL |
314 | 5441 extern int errno; |
31093
6da961dff718
Include keyboard.h before frame.h.
Andrew Innes <andrewi@gnu.org>
parents:
30720
diff
changeset
|
5442 #endif |
314 | 5443 int old_errno = errno; |
5444 | |
764 | 5445 get_frame_size (&width, &height); |
314 | 5446 |
764 | 5447 /* The frame size change obviously applies to a termcap-controlled |
5448 frame. Find such a frame in the list, and assume it's the only | |
314 | 5449 one (since the redisplay code always writes to stdout, not a |
764 | 5450 FILE * specified in the frame structure). Record the new size, |
314 | 5451 but don't reallocate the data structures now. Let that be done |
5452 later outside of the signal handler. */ | |
5453 | |
5454 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5455 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5456 |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5457 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5458 { |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5459 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
314 | 5460 { |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5461 change_frame_size (XFRAME (frame), height, width, 0, 1, 0); |
314 | 5462 break; |
5463 } | |
5464 } | |
5465 } | |
5466 | |
5467 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
5468 errno = old_errno; | |
5469 } | |
5470 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
5471 | |
5472 | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5473 /* Do any change in frame size that was requested by a signal. SAFE |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5474 non-zero means this function is called from a place where it is |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5475 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
314 | 5476 |
21514 | 5477 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5478 do_pending_window_change (safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5479 int safe; |
314 | 5480 { |
5481 /* If window_change_signal should have run before, run it now. */ | |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5482 if (redisplaying_p && !safe) |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5483 return; |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5484 |
314 | 5485 while (delayed_size_change) |
5486 { | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5487 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
314 | 5488 |
5489 delayed_size_change = 0; | |
5490 | |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5491 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
314 | 5492 { |
25012 | 5493 struct frame *f = XFRAME (frame); |
2252
9793d8654e23
* frame.h (FOR_EACH_FRAME): Change the definition so that
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2198
diff
changeset
|
5494 |
764 | 5495 int height = FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f); |
5496 int width = FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f); | |
314 | 5497 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5498 if (height != 0 || width != 0) |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5499 change_frame_size (f, height, width, 0, 0, safe); |
314 | 5500 } |
5501 } | |
5502 } | |
5503 | |
5504 | |
764 | 5505 /* Change the frame height and/or width. Values may be given as zero to |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5506 indicate no change is to take place. |
314 | 5507 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5508 If DELAY is non-zero, then assume we're being called from a signal |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5509 handler, and queue the change for later - perhaps the next |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5510 redisplay. Since this tries to resize windows, we can't call it |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5511 from a signal handler. |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5512 |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5513 SAFE non-zero means this function is called from a place where it's |
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5514 safe to change frame sizes while a redisplay is in progress. */ |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5515 |
21514 | 5516 void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5517 change_frame_size (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5518 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5519 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5520 { |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5521 Lisp_Object tail, frame; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5522 |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5523 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (f)) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5524 { |
15394
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5525 /* When using termcap, or on MS-DOS, all frames use |
8d01f71c4797
(Fredraw_frame, remake_frame_glyphs)
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15282
diff
changeset
|
5526 the same screen, so a change in size affects all frames. */ |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5527 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) |
15395
b584c2db055f
(change_frame_size, remake_frame_glyphs): Use FRAME_WINDOW_P.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
15394
diff
changeset
|
5528 if (! FRAME_WINDOW_P (XFRAME (frame))) |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5529 change_frame_size_1 (XFRAME (frame), newheight, newwidth, |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5530 pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5531 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5532 else |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5533 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe); |
10770
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5534 } |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5535 |
79745e047484
(change_frame_size_1): New subroutine.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
10745
diff
changeset
|
5536 static void |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5537 change_frame_size_1 (f, newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe) |
25012 | 5538 register struct frame *f; |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5539 int newheight, newwidth, pretend, delay, safe; |
314 | 5540 { |
16256
1ce0cb94fa68
(preserve_other_columns, preserve_my_columns): Use new
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16195
diff
changeset
|
5541 int new_frame_window_width; |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5542 int count = specpdl_ptr - specpdl; |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5543 |
314 | 5544 /* If we can't deal with the change now, queue it for later. */ |
25345
ca828f89fd6e
(do_pending_window_change): Add parameter `safe'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25318
diff
changeset
|
5545 if (delay || (redisplaying_p && !safe)) |
314 | 5546 { |
25012 | 5547 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5548 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = newwidth; | |
314 | 5549 delayed_size_change = 1; |
5550 return; | |
5551 } | |
5552 | |
764 | 5553 /* This size-change overrides any pending one for this frame. */ |
25012 | 5554 FRAME_NEW_HEIGHT (f) = 0; |
5555 FRAME_NEW_WIDTH (f) = 0; | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5556 |
3449
ad455da9b789
(do_pending_window_change): No need to clear
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
3357
diff
changeset
|
5557 /* If an argument is zero, set it to the current value. */ |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5558 if (newheight == 0) |
25012 | 5559 newheight = FRAME_HEIGHT (f); |
15896
3a3c30116313
(change_frame_size_1): Clean up conditional.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
15687
diff
changeset
|
5560 if (newwidth == 0) |
25012 | 5561 newwidth = FRAME_WIDTH (f); |
5562 | |
5563 /* Compute width of windows in F. | |
5564 This is the width of the frame without vertical scroll bars. */ | |
5565 new_frame_window_width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH_ARG (f, newwidth); | |
16881
245ba9f2781a
(change_frame_size_1): Reject new sizes if they cause overflow.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16822
diff
changeset
|
5566 |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5567 /* Round up to the smallest acceptable size. */ |
25012 | 5568 check_frame_size (f, &newheight, &newwidth); |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5569 |
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5570 /* If we're not changing the frame size, quit now. */ |
25012 | 5571 if (newheight == FRAME_HEIGHT (f) |
5572 && new_frame_window_width == FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) | |
314 | 5573 return; |
5574 | |
15078 | 5575 BLOCK_INPUT; |
5576 | |
14286
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5577 #ifdef MSDOS |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5578 /* We only can set screen dimensions to certain values supported |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5579 by our video hardware. Try to find the smallest size greater |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5580 or equal to the requested dimensions. */ |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5581 dos_set_window_size (&newheight, &newwidth); |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5582 #endif |
5d42664b4e74
(change_frame_size_1) [MSDOS]: Support frame size
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14186
diff
changeset
|
5583 |
25012 | 5584 if (newheight != FRAME_HEIGHT (f)) |
314 | 5585 { |
25012 | 5586 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f) && !FRAME_MINIBUF_ONLY_P (f)) |
314 | 5587 { |
25012 | 5588 /* Frame has both root and mini-buffer. */ |
5589 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
5590 FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)); | |
5591 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), | |
5592 (newheight | |
5593 - 1 | |
5594 - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f)), | |
5595 0); | |
5596 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f))->top, | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5597 newheight - 1); |
25012 | 5598 set_window_height (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), 1, 0); |
314 | 5599 } |
5600 else | |
764 | 5601 /* Frame has just one top-level window. */ |
25012 | 5602 set_window_height (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), |
5603 newheight - FRAME_TOP_MARGIN (f), 0); | |
5604 | |
5605 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
960
17986889d3b6
* dispnew.c (Fredraw_frame): Call clear_frame_records before
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
764
diff
changeset
|
5606 FrameRows = newheight; |
314 | 5607 } |
5608 | |
25012 | 5609 if (new_frame_window_width != FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (f)) |
314 | 5610 { |
25012 | 5611 set_window_width (FRAME_ROOT_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); |
5612 if (FRAME_HAS_MINIBUF_P (f)) | |
5613 set_window_width (FRAME_MINIBUF_WINDOW (f), new_frame_window_width, 0); | |
5614 | |
5615 if (FRAME_TERMCAP_P (f) && !pretend) | |
764 | 5616 FrameCols = newwidth; |
25012 | 5617 |
25544
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5618 if (WINDOWP (f->tool_bar_window)) |
693ca9ba497a
Change spelling of `toolbar' to `tool_bar' or `tool-bar'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25514
diff
changeset
|
5619 XSETFASTINT (XWINDOW (f->tool_bar_window)->width, newwidth); |
314 | 5620 } |
5621 | |
25012 | 5622 FRAME_HEIGHT (f) = newheight; |
5623 SET_FRAME_WIDTH (f, newwidth); | |
5624 | |
5625 { | |
5626 struct window *w = XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f)); | |
5627 int text_area_x, text_area_y, text_area_width, text_area_height; | |
5628 | |
5629 window_box (w, TEXT_AREA, &text_area_x, &text_area_y, &text_area_width, | |
5630 &text_area_height); | |
5631 if (w->cursor.x >= text_area_x + text_area_width) | |
5632 w->cursor.hpos = w->cursor.x = 0; | |
5633 if (w->cursor.y >= text_area_y + text_area_height) | |
5634 w->cursor.vpos = w->cursor.y = 0; | |
5635 } | |
5636 | |
5637 adjust_glyphs (f); | |
5638 SET_FRAME_GARBAGED (f); | |
5639 calculate_costs (f); | |
15065 | 5640 |
5641 UNBLOCK_INPUT; | |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5642 |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5643 record_unwind_protect (Fset_buffer, Fcurrent_buffer ()); |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5644 |
17282
5023bea28298
(change_frame_size_1): Call Fset_window_buffer,
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17015
diff
changeset
|
5645 /* This isn't quite a no-op: it runs window-configuration-change-hook. */ |
25012 | 5646 Fset_window_buffer (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f), |
5647 XWINDOW (FRAME_SELECTED_WINDOW (f))->buffer); | |
19627
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5648 |
c6343f7a9c6c
(change_frame_size_1): Save current buffer
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19063
diff
changeset
|
5649 unbind_to (count, Qnil); |
314 | 5650 } |
25012 | 5651 |
5652 | |
314 | 5653 |
25012 | 5654 /*********************************************************************** |
5655 Terminal Related Lisp Functions | |
5656 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5657 | |
5658 DEFUN ("open-termscript", Fopen_termscript, Sopen_termscript, | |
5659 1, 1, "FOpen termscript file: ", | |
5660 "Start writing all terminal output to FILE as well as the terminal.\n\ | |
5661 FILE = nil means just close any termscript file currently open.") | |
5662 (file) | |
5663 Lisp_Object file; | |
5664 { | |
5665 if (termscript != 0) fclose (termscript); | |
5666 termscript = 0; | |
5667 | |
5668 if (! NILP (file)) | |
5669 { | |
5670 file = Fexpand_file_name (file, Qnil); | |
5671 termscript = fopen (XSTRING (file)->data, "w"); | |
5672 if (termscript == 0) | |
5673 report_file_error ("Opening termscript", Fcons (file, Qnil)); | |
5674 } | |
5675 return Qnil; | |
5676 } | |
5677 | |
5678 | |
314 | 5679 DEFUN ("send-string-to-terminal", Fsend_string_to_terminal, |
5680 Ssend_string_to_terminal, 1, 1, 0, | |
5681 "Send STRING to the terminal without alteration.\n\ | |
5682 Control characters in STRING will have terminal-dependent effects.") | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5683 (string) |
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5684 Lisp_Object string; |
314 | 5685 { |
20618
d5acac3af6e3
(Fsend_string_to_terminal): Use size_byte.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
19627
diff
changeset
|
5686 /* ??? Perhaps we should do something special for multibyte strings here. */ |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5687 CHECK_STRING (string, 0); |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5688 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), stdout); |
314 | 5689 fflush (stdout); |
5690 if (termscript) | |
5691 { | |
21244
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5692 fwrite (XSTRING (string)->data, 1, STRING_BYTES (XSTRING (string)), |
50929073a0ba
Use STRING_BYTES and SET_STRING_BYTES.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
20708
diff
changeset
|
5693 termscript); |
314 | 5694 fflush (termscript); |
5695 } | |
5696 return Qnil; | |
5697 } | |
5698 | |
25012 | 5699 |
314 | 5700 DEFUN ("ding", Fding, Sding, 0, 1, 0, |
5701 "Beep, or flash the screen.\n\ | |
5702 Also, unless an argument is given,\n\ | |
5703 terminate any keyboard macro currently executing.") | |
5704 (arg) | |
5705 Lisp_Object arg; | |
5706 { | |
493 | 5707 if (!NILP (arg)) |
314 | 5708 { |
649
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5709 if (noninteractive) |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5710 putchar (07); |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5711 else |
61deba7b73b6
*** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
587
diff
changeset
|
5712 ring_bell (); |
314 | 5713 fflush (stdout); |
5714 } | |
5715 else | |
5716 bitch_at_user (); | |
5717 | |
5718 return Qnil; | |
5719 } | |
5720 | |
21514 | 5721 void |
314 | 5722 bitch_at_user () |
5723 { | |
5724 if (noninteractive) | |
5725 putchar (07); | |
25012 | 5726 else if (!INTERACTIVE) /* Stop executing a keyboard macro. */ |
314 | 5727 error ("Keyboard macro terminated by a command ringing the bell"); |
5728 else | |
5729 ring_bell (); | |
5730 fflush (stdout); | |
5731 } | |
5732 | |
25012 | 5733 |
5734 | |
5735 /*********************************************************************** | |
5736 Sleeping, Waiting | |
5737 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5738 | |
314 | 5739 DEFUN ("sleep-for", Fsleep_for, Ssleep_for, 1, 2, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5740 "Pause, without updating display, for SECONDS seconds.\n\ |
2648 | 5741 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5742 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5743 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5744 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5745 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5746 (seconds, milliseconds) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5747 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds; |
314 | 5748 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5749 int sec, usec; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5750 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5751 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5752 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5753 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5754 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5755 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5756 | |
5757 { | |
5758 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5759 sec = (int) duration; | |
5760 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5761 } | |
314 | 5762 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5763 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5764 if (sec == 0 && usec != 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5765 error ("millisecond `sleep-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5766 #endif |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5767 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5768 /* Assure that 0 <= usec < 1000000. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5769 if (usec < 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5770 { |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5771 /* We can't rely on the rounding being correct if user is negative. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5772 if (-1000000 < usec) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5773 sec--, usec += 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5774 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5775 sec -= -usec / 1000000, usec = 1000000 - (-usec % 1000000); |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5776 } |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5777 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5778 sec += usec / 1000000, usec %= 1000000; |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5779 |
14646
68fe10d1abd0
(Fsleep_for): Accept sub-second intervals.
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
14459
diff
changeset
|
5780 if (sec < 0 || (sec == 0 && usec == 0)) |
314 | 5781 return Qnil; |
5782 | |
650 | 5783 { |
5784 Lisp_Object zero; | |
5785 | |
9303
3115ae493c30
(direct_output_for_insert, direct_output_forward_char, change_frame_size,
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
9264
diff
changeset
|
5786 XSETFASTINT (zero, 0); |
650 | 5787 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, zero, 0); |
5788 } | |
587 | 5789 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5790 /* We should always have wait_reading_process_input; we have a dummy |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5791 implementation for systems which don't support subprocesses. */ |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5792 #if 0 |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5793 /* No wait_reading_process_input */ |
314 | 5794 immediate_quit = 1; |
5795 QUIT; | |
5796 | |
5797 #ifdef VMS | |
5798 sys_sleep (sec); | |
5799 #else /* not VMS */ | |
5800 /* The reason this is done this way | |
5801 (rather than defined (H_S) && defined (H_T)) | |
5802 is because the VMS preprocessor doesn't grok `defined' */ | |
5803 #ifdef HAVE_SELECT | |
554 | 5804 EMACS_GET_TIME (end_time); |
5805 EMACS_SET_SECS_USECS (timeout, sec, usec); | |
587 | 5806 EMACS_ADD_TIME (end_time, end_time, timeout); |
554 | 5807 |
314 | 5808 while (1) |
5809 { | |
554 | 5810 EMACS_GET_TIME (timeout); |
5811 EMACS_SUB_TIME (timeout, end_time, timeout); | |
5812 if (EMACS_TIME_NEG_P (timeout) | |
5813 || !select (1, 0, 0, 0, &timeout)) | |
314 | 5814 break; |
5815 } | |
5816 #else /* not HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5817 sleep (sec); | |
5818 #endif /* HAVE_SELECT */ | |
5819 #endif /* not VMS */ | |
5820 | |
5821 immediate_quit = 0; | |
5822 #endif /* no subprocesses */ | |
5823 | |
5824 return Qnil; | |
5825 } | |
5826 | |
25012 | 5827 |
650 | 5828 /* This is just like wait_reading_process_input, except that |
5829 it does the redisplay. | |
5830 | |
5223
db2e7e6a488e
(Fsit_for): Call prepare_menu_bars.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
5218
diff
changeset
|
5831 It's also much like Fsit_for, except that it can be used for |
11411
91bcce2fd486
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Ignore buffers whose names start with space.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
11235
diff
changeset
|
5832 waiting for input as well. */ |
650 | 5833 |
5834 Lisp_Object | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5835 sit_for (sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display) |
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5836 int sec, usec, reading, display, initial_display; |
314 | 5837 { |
650 | 5838 Lisp_Object read_kbd; |
314 | 5839 |
14964
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5840 swallow_events (display); |
9938201005a3
(sit_for): Call swallow_events.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14903
diff
changeset
|
5841 |
14757
99125e1e8bac
(sit_for): Pass DISPLAY to detect_input_pending_run_timers.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
14646
diff
changeset
|
5842 if (detect_input_pending_run_timers (display)) |
314 | 5843 return Qnil; |
650 | 5844 |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5845 if (initial_display) |
314 | 5846 redisplay_preserve_echo_area (); |
5847 | |
673 | 5848 if (sec == 0 && usec == 0) |
5849 return Qt; | |
5850 | |
314 | 5851 #ifdef SIGIO |
1915
98ecf99d7b1a
* dispnew.c (sit_for): Pass the correct number of arguments to
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
1872
diff
changeset
|
5852 gobble_input (0); |
650 | 5853 #endif |
5854 | |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5855 XSETINT (read_kbd, reading ? -1 : 1); |
650 | 5856 wait_reading_process_input (sec, usec, read_kbd, display); |
5857 | |
314 | 5858 return detect_input_pending () ? Qnil : Qt; |
5859 } | |
5860 | |
25012 | 5861 |
650 | 5862 DEFUN ("sit-for", Fsit_for, Ssit_for, 1, 3, 0, |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5863 "Perform redisplay, then wait for SECONDS seconds or until input is available.\n\ |
2648 | 5864 SECONDS may be a floating-point value, meaning that you can wait for a\n\ |
5865 fraction of a second. Optional second arg MILLISECONDS specifies an\n\ | |
5866 additional wait period, in milliseconds; this may be useful if your\n\ | |
5867 Emacs was built without floating point support.\n\ | |
5868 \(Not all operating systems support waiting for a fraction of a second.)\n\ | |
14068
a3c83dde295e
(Fsend_string_to_terminal, Fsit_for): Harmonize arguments with
Erik Naggum <erik@naggum.no>
parents:
13526
diff
changeset
|
5869 Optional third arg NODISP non-nil means don't redisplay, just wait for input.\n\ |
650 | 5870 Redisplay is preempted as always if input arrives, and does not happen\n\ |
5871 if input is available before it starts.\n\ | |
5872 Value is t if waited the full time with no input arriving.") | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5873 (seconds, milliseconds, nodisp) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5874 Lisp_Object seconds, milliseconds, nodisp; |
650 | 5875 { |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5876 int sec, usec; |
650 | 5877 |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5878 if (NILP (milliseconds)) |
9264
9338a124ea84
(redraw_frame, Fsleep_for, sit_for, Fsit_for): Use new accessor macros instead
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
8903
diff
changeset
|
5879 XSETINT (milliseconds, 0); |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5880 else |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5881 CHECK_NUMBER (milliseconds, 1); |
2648 | 5882 usec = XINT (milliseconds) * 1000; |
5883 | |
5884 { | |
5885 double duration = extract_float (seconds); | |
5886 sec = (int) duration; | |
5887 usec += (duration - sec) * 1000000; | |
5888 } | |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5889 |
650 | 5890 #ifndef EMACS_HAS_USECS |
2291
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5891 if (usec != 0 && sec == 0) |
bee5c1693cac
* dispnew.c (Fsleep_for): Make this take two arguments SECONDS and
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2288
diff
changeset
|
5892 error ("millisecond `sit-for' not supported on %s", SYSTEM_TYPE); |
650 | 5893 #endif |
5894 | |
17961
86ae1679df19
(sit_for): New arg initial_display.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
17895
diff
changeset
|
5895 return sit_for (sec, usec, 0, NILP (nodisp), NILP (nodisp)); |
650 | 5896 } |
25012 | 5897 |
5898 | |
314 | 5899 |
25012 | 5900 /*********************************************************************** |
5901 Other Lisp Functions | |
5902 ***********************************************************************/ | |
5903 | |
5904 /* A vector of size >= 2 * NFRAMES + 3 * NBUFFERS + 1, containing the | |
5905 session's frames, frame names, buffers, buffer-read-only flags, and | |
5906 buffer-modified-flags, and a trailing sentinel (so we don't need to | |
5907 add length checks). */ | |
5908 | |
5909 static Lisp_Object frame_and_buffer_state; | |
5910 | |
5911 | |
5912 DEFUN ("frame-or-buffer-changed-p", Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p, | |
5913 Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p, 0, 0, 0, | |
5914 "Return non-nil if the frame and buffer state appears to have changed.\n\ | |
5915 The state variable is an internal vector containing all frames and buffers,\n\ | |
5916 aside from buffers whose names start with space,\n\ | |
5917 along with the buffers' read-only and modified flags, which allows a fast\n\ | |
5918 check to see whether the menu bars might need to be recomputed.\n\ | |
5919 If this function returns non-nil, it updates the internal vector to reflect\n\ | |
5920 the current state.\n") | |
5921 () | |
5922 { | |
5923 Lisp_Object tail, frame, buf; | |
5924 Lisp_Object *vecp; | |
5925 int n; | |
5926 | |
5927 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5928 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5929 { | |
5930 if (!EQ (*vecp++, frame)) | |
5931 goto changed; | |
5932 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XFRAME (frame)->name)) | |
5933 goto changed; | |
5934 } | |
5935 /* Check that the buffer info matches. | |
5936 No need to test for the end of the vector | |
5937 because the last element of the vector is lambda | |
5938 and that will always cause a mismatch. */ | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5939 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5940 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5941 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5942 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5943 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5944 continue; | |
5945 if (!EQ (*vecp++, buf)) | |
5946 goto changed; | |
5947 if (!EQ (*vecp++, XBUFFER (buf)->read_only)) | |
5948 goto changed; | |
5949 if (!EQ (*vecp++, Fbuffer_modified_p (buf))) | |
5950 goto changed; | |
5951 } | |
5952 /* Detect deletion of a buffer at the end of the list. */ | |
5953 if (EQ (*vecp, Qlambda)) | |
5954 return Qnil; | |
5955 changed: | |
5956 /* Start with 1 so there is room for at least one lambda at the end. */ | |
5957 n = 1; | |
5958 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5959 n += 2; | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5960 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5961 n += 3; |
5962 /* Reallocate the vector if it's grown, or if it's shrunk a lot. */ | |
5963 if (n > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size | |
5964 || n + 20 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size / 2) | |
5965 /* Add 20 extra so we grow it less often. */ | |
5966 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (n + 20), Qlambda); | |
5967 vecp = XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents; | |
5968 FOR_EACH_FRAME (tail, frame) | |
5969 { | |
5970 *vecp++ = frame; | |
5971 *vecp++ = XFRAME (frame)->name; | |
5972 } | |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5973 for (tail = Vbuffer_alist; CONSP (tail); tail = XCDR (tail)) |
25012 | 5974 { |
26164
d39ec0a27081
more XCAR/XCDR/XFLOAT_DATA uses, to help isolete lisp engine
Ken Raeburn <raeburn@raeburn.org>
parents:
26088
diff
changeset
|
5975 buf = XCDR (XCAR (tail)); |
25012 | 5976 /* Ignore buffers that aren't included in buffer lists. */ |
5977 if (XSTRING (XBUFFER (buf)->name)->data[0] == ' ') | |
5978 continue; | |
5979 *vecp++ = buf; | |
5980 *vecp++ = XBUFFER (buf)->read_only; | |
5981 *vecp++ = Fbuffer_modified_p (buf); | |
5982 } | |
5983 /* Fill up the vector with lambdas (always at least one). */ | |
5984 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5985 while (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5986 < XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5987 *vecp++ = Qlambda; | |
5988 /* Make sure we didn't overflow the vector. */ | |
5989 if (vecp - XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->contents | |
5990 > XVECTOR (frame_and_buffer_state)->size) | |
5991 abort (); | |
5992 return Qt; | |
5993 } | |
5994 | |
5995 | |
5996 | |
5997 /*********************************************************************** | |
5998 Initialization | |
5999 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6000 | |
314 | 6001 char *terminal_type; |
6002 | |
25012 | 6003 /* Initialization done when Emacs fork is started, before doing stty. |
6004 Determine terminal type and set terminal_driver. Then invoke its | |
6005 decoding routine to set up variables in the terminal package. */ | |
314 | 6006 |
21514 | 6007 void |
314 | 6008 init_display () |
6009 { | |
6010 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
6011 extern int display_arg; | |
6012 #endif | |
6013 | |
25012 | 6014 /* Construct the space glyph. */ |
6015 space_glyph.type = CHAR_GLYPH; | |
6016 SET_CHAR_GLYPH_FROM_GLYPH (space_glyph, ' '); | |
6017 space_glyph.charpos = -1; | |
6018 | |
314 | 6019 meta_key = 0; |
6020 inverse_video = 0; | |
6021 cursor_in_echo_area = 0; | |
6022 terminal_type = (char *) 0; | |
6023 | |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6024 /* Now is the time to initialize this; it's used by init_sys_modes |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6025 during startup. */ |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6026 Vwindow_system = Qnil; |
314 | 6027 |
2339
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6028 /* If the user wants to use a window system, we shouldn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6029 initializing the terminal. This is especially important when the |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6030 terminal is so dumb that emacs gives up before and doesn't bother |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6031 using the window system. |
a302de11debf
* dispnew.c (init_display): Initialize Vwindow_system.
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2292
diff
changeset
|
6032 |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6033 If the DISPLAY environment variable is set and nonempty, |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6034 try to use X, and die with an error message if that doesn't work. */ |
314 | 6035 |
6036 #ifdef HAVE_X_WINDOWS | |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6037 if (! display_arg) |
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6038 { |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6039 char *display; |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6040 #ifdef VMS |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6041 display = getenv ("DECW$DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6042 #else |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6043 display = getenv ("DISPLAY"); |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6044 #endif |
14125
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6045 |
2f222e8b06f5
(init_display): Treat null string DISPLAY var like not set.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
14068
diff
changeset
|
6046 display_arg = (display != 0 && *display != 0); |
2364 | 6047 } |
2359
90a5f91329f3
* dispnew.c (init_display): Get display name from environment
Jim Blandy <jimb@redhat.com>
parents:
2339
diff
changeset
|
6048 |
18774
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6049 if (!inhibit_window_system && display_arg |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6050 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6051 && initialized |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6052 #endif |
95b4ac950a5d
(init_display): Go ahead and prepare for
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
18015
diff
changeset
|
6053 ) |
314 | 6054 { |
6055 Vwindow_system = intern ("x"); | |
6056 #ifdef HAVE_X11 | |
6057 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (11); | |
6058 #else | |
6059 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (10); | |
6060 #endif | |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6061 #if defined (LINUX) && defined (HAVE_LIBNCURSES) |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6062 /* In some versions of ncurses, |
15282 | 6063 tputs crashes if we have not called tgetent. |
15273
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6064 So call tgetent. */ |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6065 { char b[2044]; tgetent (b, "xterm");} |
db889dd732a1
(init_display) [HAVE_LIBNCURSES]: If X, call tgetent.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
15078
diff
changeset
|
6066 #endif |
25012 | 6067 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
314 | 6068 return; |
6069 } | |
6070 #endif /* HAVE_X_WINDOWS */ | |
6071 | |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6072 #ifdef HAVE_NTGUI |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6073 if (!inhibit_window_system) |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6074 { |
16589
ec300a10e407
(init_display) [HAVE_NTGUI]: Use w32 for window-system.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
16412
diff
changeset
|
6075 Vwindow_system = intern ("w32"); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6076 Vwindow_system_version = make_number (1); |
25012 | 6077 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
13408
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6078 return; |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6079 } |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6080 #endif /* HAVE_NTGUI */ |
7e92386e1cf7
[HAVE_NTGUI]: Include w32term.h.
Geoff Voelker <voelker@cs.washington.edu>
parents:
13220
diff
changeset
|
6081 |
314 | 6082 /* If no window system has been specified, try to use the terminal. */ |
6083 if (! isatty (0)) | |
6084 { | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6085 fatal ("standard input is not a tty"); |
314 | 6086 exit (1); |
6087 } | |
6088 | |
6089 /* Look at the TERM variable */ | |
6090 terminal_type = (char *) getenv ("TERM"); | |
6091 if (!terminal_type) | |
6092 { | |
6093 #ifdef VMS | |
6094 fprintf (stderr, "Please specify your terminal type.\n\ | |
6095 For types defined in VMS, use set term /device=TYPE.\n\ | |
6096 For types not defined in VMS, use define emacs_term \"TYPE\".\n\ | |
6097 \(The quotation marks are necessary since terminal types are lower case.)\n"); | |
6098 #else | |
6099 fprintf (stderr, "Please set the environment variable TERM; see tset(1).\n"); | |
6100 #endif | |
6101 exit (1); | |
6102 } | |
6103 | |
6104 #ifdef VMS | |
25012 | 6105 /* VMS DCL tends to up-case things, so down-case term type. |
314 | 6106 Hardly any uppercase letters in terminal types; should be none. */ |
6107 { | |
6108 char *new = (char *) xmalloc (strlen (terminal_type) + 1); | |
6109 char *p; | |
6110 | |
6111 strcpy (new, terminal_type); | |
6112 | |
6113 for (p = new; *p; p++) | |
6114 if (isupper (*p)) | |
6115 *p = tolower (*p); | |
6116 | |
6117 terminal_type = new; | |
6118 } | |
25012 | 6119 #endif /* VMS */ |
314 | 6120 |
6121 term_init (terminal_type); | |
25012 | 6122 |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6123 { |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6124 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME (); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6125 int width = FRAME_WINDOW_WIDTH (sf); |
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6126 int height = FRAME_HEIGHT (sf); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6127 |
25012 | 6128 unsigned int total_glyphs = height * (width + 2) * sizeof (struct glyph); |
6129 | |
6130 /* If these sizes are so big they cause overflow, just ignore the | |
6131 change. It's not clear what better we could do. */ | |
6132 if (total_glyphs / sizeof (struct glyph) / height != width + 2) | |
16896
b2c51d6de440
(init_display): Use `fatal'.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16891
diff
changeset
|
6133 fatal ("screen size %dx%d too big", width, height); |
16891
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6134 } |
989845750a4d
(init_display): Check for overflow in screen size.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
16881
diff
changeset
|
6135 |
25012 | 6136 adjust_frame_glyphs_initially (); |
25666
063da8f6a487
(selected_frame): Make it a Lisp_Object.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
25546
diff
changeset
|
6137 calculate_costs (XFRAME (selected_frame)); |
314 | 6138 |
6139 #ifdef SIGWINCH | |
6140 #ifndef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6141 if (initialized) | |
6142 #endif /* CANNOT_DUMP */ | |
6143 signal (SIGWINCH, window_change_signal); | |
6144 #endif /* SIGWINCH */ | |
25012 | 6145 |
6146 /* Set up faces of the initial terminal frame of a dumped Emacs. */ | |
6147 if (initialized | |
6148 && !noninteractive | |
25118
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6149 #ifdef MSDOS |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6150 /* The MSDOS terminal turns on its ``window system'' relatively |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6151 late into the startup, so we cannot do the frame faces' |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6152 initialization just yet. It will be done later by pc-win.el |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6153 and internal_terminal_init. */ |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6154 && (strcmp (terminal_type, "internal") != 0 || inhibit_window_system) |
08ae9ffe6763
(init_display) [MSDOS]: Don't initialize frame faces,
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
25012
diff
changeset
|
6155 #endif |
25012 | 6156 && NILP (Vwindow_system)) |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6157 { |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6158 /* For the initial frame, we don't have any way of knowing what |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6159 are the foreground and background colors of the terminal. */ |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6160 struct frame *sf = SELECTED_FRAME(); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6161 |
26902
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6162 FRAME_FOREGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_FG_COLOR; |
264b83a3a688
Changes for separate unspecified foreground and background colors
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26851
diff
changeset
|
6163 FRAME_BACKGROUND_PIXEL (sf) = FACE_TTY_DEFAULT_BG_COLOR; |
26729
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6164 call0 (intern ("tty-set-up-initial-frame-faces")); |
f5dded41adcc
Changes for automatic remapping of X colors on terminal frames:
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents:
26591
diff
changeset
|
6165 } |
314 | 6166 } |
25012 | 6167 |
6168 | |
314 | 6169 |
25012 | 6170 /*********************************************************************** |
6171 Blinking cursor | |
6172 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6173 | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6174 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor", Finternal_show_cursor, |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6175 Sinternal_show_cursor, 2, 2, 0, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6176 "Set the cursor-visibility flag of WINDOW to SHOW.\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6177 WINDOW nil means use the selected window. SHOW non-nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6178 show a cursor in WINDOW in the next redisplay. SHOW nil means\n\ |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6179 don't show a cursor.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6180 (window, show) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6181 Lisp_Object window, show; |
25012 | 6182 { |
6183 /* Don't change cursor state while redisplaying. This could confuse | |
6184 output routines. */ | |
6185 if (!redisplaying_p) | |
6186 { | |
6187 if (NILP (window)) | |
6188 window = selected_window; | |
6189 else | |
6190 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); | |
6191 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6192 XWINDOW (window)->cursor_off_p = NILP (show); |
25012 | 6193 } |
6194 | |
6195 return Qnil; | |
6196 } | |
6197 | |
6198 | |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6199 DEFUN ("internal-show-cursor-p", Finternal_show_cursor_p, |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6200 Sinternal_show_cursor_p, 0, 1, 0, |
26499
10af169a628b
(Finternal_show_cursor_p): Fix doc string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
26334
diff
changeset
|
6201 "Value is non-nil if next redisplay will display a cursor in WINDOW.\n\ |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6202 WINDOW nil or omitted means report on the selected window.") |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6203 (window) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6204 Lisp_Object window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6205 { |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6206 struct window *w; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6207 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6208 if (NILP (window)) |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6209 window = selected_window; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6210 else |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6211 CHECK_WINDOW (window, 2); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6212 |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6213 w = XWINDOW (window); |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6214 return w->cursor_off_p ? Qnil : Qt; |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6215 } |
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6216 |
25012 | 6217 |
6218 /*********************************************************************** | |
6219 Initialization | |
6220 ***********************************************************************/ | |
6221 | |
21514 | 6222 void |
314 | 6223 syms_of_display () |
6224 { | |
764 | 6225 defsubr (&Sredraw_frame); |
314 | 6226 defsubr (&Sredraw_display); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6227 defsubr (&Sframe_or_buffer_changed_p); |
314 | 6228 defsubr (&Sopen_termscript); |
6229 defsubr (&Sding); | |
6230 defsubr (&Ssit_for); | |
6231 defsubr (&Ssleep_for); | |
6232 defsubr (&Ssend_string_to_terminal); | |
26280
083835afced5
(Finternal_show_cursor): Renamed from Fshow_cursor.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26164
diff
changeset
|
6233 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor); |
26334
e3a9ceb7a557
(Finternal_show_cursor): Change it to set the
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
26280
diff
changeset
|
6234 defsubr (&Sinternal_show_cursor_p); |
314 | 6235 |
12186
6811992e871c
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): Calculate vector size right.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
11919
diff
changeset
|
6236 frame_and_buffer_state = Fmake_vector (make_number (20), Qlambda); |
7810
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6237 staticpro (&frame_and_buffer_state); |
15c0bf73737e
(Fframe_or_buffer_changed_p): New function.
Karl Heuer <kwzh@gnu.org>
parents:
7808
diff
changeset
|
6238 |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6239 Qdisplay_table = intern ("display-table"); |
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6240 staticpro (&Qdisplay_table); |
30720
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
6241 Qredisplay_dont_pause = intern ("redisplay-dont-pause"); |
64f3338f72d8
(Qredisplay_dont_pause): New variable.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents:
30713
diff
changeset
|
6242 staticpro (&Qredisplay_dont_pause); |
13220
2e9014617492
(Qdisplay_table): New variable.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
13105
diff
changeset
|
6243 |
314 | 6244 DEFVAR_INT ("baud-rate", &baud_rate, |
7926
b87f2c705501
(syms_of_display): Make baud-rate a user var.
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents:
7900
diff
changeset
|
6245 "*The output baud rate of the terminal.\n\ |
314 | 6246 On most systems, changing this value will affect the amount of padding\n\ |
6247 and the other strategic decisions made during redisplay."); | |
25012 | 6248 |
314 | 6249 DEFVAR_BOOL ("inverse-video", &inverse_video, |
764 | 6250 "*Non-nil means invert the entire frame display.\n\ |
314 | 6251 This means everything is in inverse video which otherwise would not be."); |
25012 | 6252 |
314 | 6253 DEFVAR_BOOL ("visible-bell", &visible_bell, |
764 | 6254 "*Non-nil means try to flash the frame to represent a bell."); |
25012 | 6255 |
314 | 6256 DEFVAR_BOOL ("no-redraw-on-reenter", &no_redraw_on_reenter, |
764 | 6257 "*Non-nil means no need to redraw entire frame after suspending.\n\ |
314 | 6258 A non-nil value is useful if the terminal can automatically preserve\n\ |
764 | 6259 Emacs's frame display when you reenter Emacs.\n\ |
314 | 6260 It is up to you to set this variable if your terminal can do that."); |
25012 | 6261 |
314 | 6262 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system", &Vwindow_system, |
6263 "A symbol naming the window-system under which Emacs is running\n\ | |
6264 \(such as `x'), or nil if emacs is running on an ordinary terminal."); | |
25012 | 6265 |
314 | 6266 DEFVAR_LISP ("window-system-version", &Vwindow_system_version, |
6267 "The version number of the window system in use.\n\ | |
6268 For X windows, this is 10 or 11."); | |
25012 | 6269 |
314 | 6270 DEFVAR_BOOL ("cursor-in-echo-area", &cursor_in_echo_area, |
6271 "Non-nil means put cursor in minibuffer, at end of any message there."); | |
25012 | 6272 |
314 | 6273 DEFVAR_LISP ("glyph-table", &Vglyph_table, |
764 | 6274 "Table defining how to output a glyph code to the frame.\n\ |
314 | 6275 If not nil, this is a vector indexed by glyph code to define the glyph.\n\ |
6276 Each element can be:\n\ | |
6277 integer: a glyph code which this glyph is an alias for.\n\ | |
6278 string: output this glyph using that string (not impl. in X windows).\n\ | |
6279 nil: this glyph mod 256 is char code to output,\n\ | |
6857 | 6280 and this glyph / 256 is face code for X windows (see `face-id')."); |
314 | 6281 Vglyph_table = Qnil; |
6282 | |
6283 DEFVAR_LISP ("standard-display-table", &Vstandard_display_table, | |
6284 "Display table to use for buffers that specify none.\n\ | |
6285 See `buffer-display-table' for more information."); | |
6286 Vstandard_display_table = Qnil; | |
6287 | |
25012 | 6288 DEFVAR_BOOL ("redisplay-dont-pause", &redisplay_dont_pause, |
6289 "*Non-nil means update isn't paused when input is detected."); | |
6290 redisplay_dont_pause = 0; | |
6291 | |
314 | 6292 /* Initialize `window-system', unless init_display already decided it. */ |
6293 #ifdef CANNOT_DUMP | |
6294 if (noninteractive) | |
6295 #endif | |
6296 { | |
6297 Vwindow_system = Qnil; | |
6298 Vwindow_system_version = Qnil; | |
6299 } | |
6300 } |